Instruction manual

ManualsBrandsMTS Systems ManualsComputer equipmentVIP 1216 PVR

Meridian 1 and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise 1000

Features and Services

Book 2 of 3

Document Number: 553-3001-306

Document Release: Standard 10.00

Date: January 2002

Printed in Canada

Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design

or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant. This equipment has been tested

and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules, and the

radio interference regulations of the Industry Canada. These limits are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance

with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this

equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case users will be required to

correct the interference at their own expense.

SL-1, Meridian 1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

Summary of content (1112 pages)

PAGE 1
Meridian 1 and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise 1000 Features and Services Book 2 of 3 Document Number: 553-3001-306 Document Release: Standard 10.00 Date: January 2002 Copyright ©1994–2002 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved Printed in Canada Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
Page 5 of 3156 ContentsBook 1 of 3 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Features and Software options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 10/20 Digit ANI on 911 Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Operation . . 87 2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface Enhancements . 93 2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 2 Mbps Remote Peripheral Equipment Alarm Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 4
Page 6 of 3156 553-3001-306 Activity Codes for Not Ready State . . . . . . . . . . 181 Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Alternative Conference Pad Levels . . . . . . . . . . 189 Alternative Loss Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Alternative Loss Plan for China . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Alternative Routing for DID/DDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Application Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 5
Page 7 of 3156 Attendant Call Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Attendant Calls Waiting Indication . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Attendant Clearing during Night Service . . . . . . 301 Attendant Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Attendant Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Attendant Display of Speed Call or Autodial . . . 325 Attendant Forward No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Attendant Incoming Call Indicators .
PAGE 6
Page 8 of 3156 553-3001-306 Autodial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Autodial Tandem Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Automatic Answerback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Automatic Call Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Automatic Gain Control Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Automatic Guard Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Automatic Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 7
Page 9 of 3156 B34 Codec Static Loss Plan Downloading . . . . . 555 B34 Dynamic Loss Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Background Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Boss/Secretary Filtering Enhancement . . . . . . . 577 Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 Busy Lamp Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 Busy Tone Detection for Asia Pacific and CALA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 8
Page 10 of 3156 553-3001-306 Call Forward to Trunk Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . 707 Call Forward, Internal Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 Call Hold, Deluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743 Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement . . . . . .
PAGE 9
Page 11 of 3156 Calling Party Name Display Denied . . . . . . . . . . . 881 Calling Party Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889 Calling Party Privacy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891 Camp-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 Camp-On, Forced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919 Camp-On to Multiple Appearance Directory Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 10
Page 12 of 3156 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 11
Page 13 of 3156 ContentsBook 2 of 3 China – Attendant Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 China – Busy Tone Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 China – Flexible Feature Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 China – Supervised Analog Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 China – Toll Call Loss Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031 CIS ANI Reception . . . . . . . .
PAGE 12
Page 14 of 3156 Console Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185 Console Presentation Group Level Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 Controlled Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced . . . . . . . 1201 CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . 1209 D-channel Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219 Departmental Listed Directory Number . . . . . . .
PAGE 13
Page 15 of 3156 Direct Inward Dialing Recall Features on DTI2 for Italy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291 Direct Inward Dialing to TIE Connection . . . . . . . 1297 Direct Inward System Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301 Direct Inward System Access on Unsupervised Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 Direct Private Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 Directory Number Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 14
Page 16 of 3156 End-to-End Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407 End-to-End Signaling Display Enhancement . . . 1415 Enhanced Maintenance (Patching) . . . . . . . . . . . 1419 Enhanced Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421 Equal Access Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429 Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439 Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 15
Page 17 of 3156 Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509 Flexible Feature Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515 Flexible Key Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529 Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer . . . . . . . . . . . 1531 Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control . . . . . . . . 1533 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections . . . . . . . . . 1539 Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 16
Page 18 of 3156 Hong Kong Digital Trunk Interface . . . . . . . . . . . 1645 Hot Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649 Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665 Hunting by Call Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689 ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1693 In-Band Automatic Number Identification . . . . .
PAGE 17
Page 19 of 3156 Intercept Computer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1821 Intercept Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1829 Intercept Treatment Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . 1835 International Meridian 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1839 Inventory Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1845 ISDN QSIG Call Diversion Notification Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1861 Italian Central Office Special Services . . .
PAGE 18
Page 20 of 3156 LOGIVOX Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1925 Loop Start Supervisory Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1929 Loop Start Supervisory Trunks (Incoming Calls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1933 Loopback on Public Exchange/ Central Office Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937 M2312 Digit Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939 Make Set Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 19
Page 21 of 3156 Meridian 911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2039 Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity . . . . . .
PAGE 20
Page 22 of 3156 Features and Services
PAGE 21
Page 23 of 3156 ContentsBook 3 of 3 Meridian Companion / Meridian Companion DECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2071 Meridian Hospitality Voice Services . . . . . . . . . . 2075 Meridian Mail Trunk Access Restriction . . . . . . . 2081 Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration . . . 2091 Message Intercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2117 Message Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 22
Page 24 of 3156 Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2223 Multiple Console Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2239 Multiple Customer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2245 Multi-Site Mobility Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2247 Multi-Tenant Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2255 Music Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2279 Music . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 23
Page 25 of 3156 Off-Premise Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2411 Off-Premise Station Analog Line Card . . . . . . . . 2413 On Hold on Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2423 On-Hook Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2431 Optional Outpulsing Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2433 Outgoing Hold Timer Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2435 Out-of-Service Unit (OOSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2439 Overlay 45 Limited Repeats . . .
PAGE 24
Page 26 of 3156 Phantom Terminal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2539 Position Busy with Call on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2547 Predictive Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2549 Pretranslation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2567 Pretranslation and System Speed Call Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2587 Preventing Reciprocal Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . 2595 Prime Directory Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 25
Page 27 of 3156 Recorded Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2703 Recorded Announcement Broadcast . . . . . . . . . 2709 Recorded Overflow Announcement . . . . . . . . . . 2739 Recorded Telephone Dictation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2745 Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2749 Reference Clock Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2755 Remote Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 26
Page 28 of 3156 Room Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2813 Scheduled Access Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2823 Secrecy Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2839 Secretarial Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2843 Seizure Acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2847 Selectable Conferee Display and Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2849 Selectable Directory Number Size . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 27
Page 29 of 3156 Speed Call Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2925 Speed Call Directory Number Access . . . . . . . . . 2931 Speed Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2937 Speed Call/Autodial with Authorization Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2947 Speed Call on Private Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2951 Speed Call, System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2953 Station Activity Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 28
Page 30 of 3156 Tone to Last Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 Tones and Cadences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3061 Tones, Flexible Incoming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3069 Total Redirection Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3073 Trunk Barring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3079 Trunk Failure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3089 Trunk Failure Monitor Enhancement . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 29
Page 987 of 3156 China – Attendant Monitor Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attendant Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 987 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 30
Page 988 of 3156 China – Attendant Monitor • There is no click sound given to the connected parties upon attendant connection when the no tone option is configured. • The tone to the connected parties may or may not be given depending on the new customer tone option for Attendant Monitor. • The display (if there is one) on any parties involved in the call does not indicate that the attendant is monitoring.
PAGE 31
China – Attendant Monitor Page 989 of 3156 If an attendant is Barged-In with a trunk, a second attendant defined at the same customer location will be blocked from monitoring any party involved in the monitored call. Attendant Break-In If an attendant is monitoring a DN, a second attendant defined at the same customer site will be blocked from Breaking In to any party involved in the monitored call.
PAGE 32
Page 990 of 3156 China – Attendant Monitor Call Hold, Permanent Monitoring is not affected if anybody involved in the monitor’s call activates hold, except for the case of a simple call. For a monitored simple call, activating hold deactivates monitoring. In all cases, activation of music on hold deactivates monitoring. An attendant monitoring a call cannot put the monitored DN on hold. The attendant pressing the hold key has no effect while monitoring is enabled.
PAGE 33
China – Attendant Monitor Page 991 of 3156 Do Not Disturb If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which has Do Not Disturb activated and is idle, idle DN treatment is given. Make Set Busy If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which has Make Set Busy activated and is idle, idle DN treatment is given. Malicious Call Trace If a party involved in a monitored call activates the TRC key, monitoring is immediately deactivated.
PAGE 34
Page 992 of 3156 China – Attendant Monitor Private Line Attendant Monitor is blocked from monitoring a Private DN. Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 15 – Enable the Attendant Monitor option for a customer, and then either allow or deny the tone option.
PAGE 35
China – Attendant Monitor KEY Page 993 of 3156 00 BVR Allow both Busy Verify and Attendant Monitor on key 00. 01 BIN Allow both Barge-In and Attendant Monitor on key 01. Feature operation Monitor a DN 1 Press an idle Loop key on the Attendant Console. The Loop indicator is lit. 2 Press the Busy Verify key. The Busy Verify lamp is lit. 3 Press the Busy Verify key again to enable Attendant Monitor.
PAGE 36
Page 994 of 3156 China – Attendant Monitor — Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is already involved in a monitored call by another attendant. — Attendant Monitor is active when the extension is busy. The attendant is able to listen to all connected parties. If the Attendant Monitor Customer tone is denied (TOD), there is no indication given to the connected parties that the attendant is monitoring.
PAGE 37
China – Attendant Monitor Page 995 of 3156 — Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is idle. — Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is not assigned. — Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is already being monitored by another attendant. — Attendant Monitor is active when the trunk is busy. The attendant is able to listen to all parties on the trunk.
PAGE 38
Page 996 of 3156 553-3001-306 China – Attendant Monitor Standard 10.
PAGE 39
Page 997 of 3156 China – Busy Tone Detection Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 40
Page 998 of 3156 China – Busy Tone Detection Operating parameters The Busy Tone Detection functionality is implemented on the Enhanced Extended Universal Trunk Card for China (NTRA10AA). The Meridian 1 will disconnect any call once busy tone is detected on the incoming side of the trunk. If the user on the far end causes busy tone to be generated by any means, the call will be disconnected whether or not that was the intention.
PAGE 41
China – Busy Tone Detection Page 999 of 3156 Feature packaging China - Busy Tone Detection requires Busy Tone Detection (BTD) package 294, which depends upon Meridian 1 Extended Peripheral Equipment (XPE) package 203. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 97 – Busy Tone table configuration. 2 LD 14 – Busy Tone Detection Table and Busy Tone Supervision assignment.
PAGE 42
Page 1000 of 3156 China – Busy Tone Detection LD 14 – Busy Tone Detection Table and Busy Tone Supervision assignment. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW Create or change a route. TYPE COT Central Office trunk. TN lscu cu Trunk Terminal Number. Terminal Number for the Option 11C. XTRK EXUT Extended Universal Trunk. LOP Loop Start signaling. (NO) YES Supervision. ... SIGL ...
PAGE 43
Page 1001 of 3156 China – Flexible Feature Codes Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Busy Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outgoing Call Barring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 44
Page 1002 of 3156 China – Flexible Feature Codes Feature description Three Flexible Feature Code (FFC) features have been developed to meet the requirements of the Chinese Ministry of Posts and Telecommunications for the rural switch market in China, these features can be used in other markets. The three features are Busy Number Redial (BNR), Customer Call Forward (CCFW), and Outgoing Call Barring (OCB).
PAGE 45
China – Flexible Feature Codes Page 1003 of 3156 Operating parameters Although designed for China, the China – Flexible Feature Codes feature can be used in other markets. Busy Number Redial is only available for internal calls and for trunk calls that provide a busy signal when busy tone is given. Busy Number Redial and Customer Call Forward are only available for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. Outgoing Call Barring does not apply to BRI sets. The Reply DN for CCFW is limited to 16 digits.
PAGE 46
Page 1004 of 3156 China – Flexible Feature Codes Feature interactions Busy Number Redial Autodial Activation of Busy Number Redial changes the activation of Autodial. The DN that is autodialed becomes the DN that was busy. When the BNR activation timer expires or the busy DN is redialed when it is idle, the autodial capability is deactivated, but the number saved is not cleared. If Autodial is then activated without entering a DN, the number used is the formerly busy DN.
PAGE 47
China – Flexible Feature Codes Page 1005 of 3156 Call Forward All Calls When CCFW is active Call Forward All Calls (CFWAC) cannot be activated by Flexible Feature Code, but can be activated by SPRE. When CFWAC is active, CCFW cannot be activated. CCFW can be deactivated by deactivating CFWAC. CFWAC can only be deactivated by the CCFD FFC if the current CFW DN is the same as the current CCFW DN. Deactivate Feature FFC The Deactivate Feature FFC deactivates Customer Call Forward.
PAGE 48
Page 1006 of 3156 China – Flexible Feature Codes Digit Display Meridian 1 proprietary telephones with displays do not display the OCB level and the Station Control Password (SCPW) when OCB FFCs are dialed. This protects the security of the SCPW. Flexible Feature Codes Flexible Feature Codes containing a “*” or an “#” will always be allowed by OCB. Therefore, FFCs which can be used to make a call should be entirely numeric if barring of them is required.
PAGE 49
China – Flexible Feature Codes Page 1007 of 3156 Outpulsing of Asterisks and Octothorpes The NFCR trees used for Outgoing Call Barring are allowed to contain asterisks and octothorpes when the Outpulsing of Asterisk and Octothorpe (OPAO) package 104 is equipped. These special digits will only be used for processing dialed digits on routes with OPAO allowed.
PAGE 50
Page 1008 of 3156 China – Flexible Feature Codes Feature packaging China – Flexible Feature Codes is contained in base X11 system software.
PAGE 51
China – Flexible Feature Codes Page 1009 of 3156 TYPE FTR Features and options. - SPRE nnnn Special Function Prefix (required for FFCs to operate). LD 56 – Define Confirmation Tone. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change existing data. TYPE FTC Flexible Tones and Cadences. TABL 0-31 FTC Table Number. HCCT YES Hardware controlled cadences and tones. ... - FFCT Configure Confirmation Tone. - - XTON 0-(4)-255 XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code.
PAGE 52
Page 1010 of 3156 China – Flexible Feature Codes LD 57 – Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Busy Number Redial. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change existing data. TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes. CUST xx Customer number. FFCT (NO) YES Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone. CODE Change code. - DEAF xxxx Deactivate Feature. - BNRA xxxx Busy Number Redial activation code. - BNRD xxxx Busy Number Redial deactivation code.
PAGE 53
China – Flexible Feature Codes Page 1011 of 3156 LD 10 – Allow Busy Number Redial for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change existing data. TYPE: 500 Telephone type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. Terminal Number for the Option 11C. CLS (BNRD) BNRA (Deny) allow Busy Number Redial for this telephone. FTR ADL xx Autodial, where: xx = the maximum number of digits that can be stored.
PAGE 54
Page 1012 of 3156 China – Flexible Feature Codes - CCFA xxxx Customer Call Forward activation code. - CCFD xxxx Customer Call Forward deactivation code. LD 15 – Add or change the Reply DN for Customer Call Forward. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change existing data. TYPE: RDR Gate opener. CUST xx Customer number. - CCFWDN dd..dd X Customer Call Forward DN (maximum of 16 digits). X to delete.
PAGE 55
China – Flexible Feature Codes Page 1013 of 3156 3 LD 49 – Create NFCR trees for Outgoing Call Barring. 4 LD 10 – Allow Outgoing Call Barring for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. 5 LD 11 – Allow Outgoing Call Barring for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. LD 57 – Configure the Flexible Feature Codes for Outgoing Call Barring. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change existing data. TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes. CUST xx Customer number.
PAGE 56
Page 1014 of 3156 China – Flexible Feature Codes - OCB2 0-MAXT NFCR tree for Outgoing Call Barring level 2. Enter 255 to deactivate. - OCB3 0-MAXT NFCR tree for Outgoing Call Barring level 3. Enter 255 to deactivate. TYPE FFC Gate opener. CUST 0-99 Customer number. - SCPL 0-8 Station Control Password Length. LD 49 – Create NFCR trees for Outgoing Call Barring. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW Add new data. TYPE FCR Flexible Code Restriction. CUST xx Customer number.
PAGE 57
China – Flexible Feature Codes Page 1015 of 3156 LD 10 – Allow Outgoing Call Barring for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change existing data. TYPE: 500 Telephone type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. Terminal Number for the Option 11C. SCPW xxxx Station Control Password. Length must match SCPL in LD 15. CLS (OCBD) OCBA (Deny) allow Outgoing Call Barring. LD 11 – Allow Outgoing Call Barring for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
PAGE 58
Page 1016 of 3156 China – Flexible Feature Codes When the user goes off-hook and does not dial within the number of seconds configured for the Autodial Delay timer (ADLD) the busy number is automatically redialed. If the DN is idle when redialed, the feature is deactivated, otherwise it remains available for 20 minutes. The feature can be deactivated manually by dialing the BNRD FFC, or the Deactivate Feature FFC. The user again hears confirmation tone.
PAGE 59
Page 1017 of 3156 China – Supervised Analog Lines Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 Battery Reversal Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 Hook Flash Disconnect Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 60
Page 1018 of 3156 China – Supervised Analog Lines In the idle state, the analog port in the Meridian 1 provides ground signal on the tip lead and battery on the ring lead. This polarity is maintained during dialing and ringing at the far end. When the far end answers, the battery and ground connections are reversed. The reverse battery is maintained while the call is established.
PAGE 61
China – Supervised Analog Lines Page 1019 of 3156 Operating parameters This feature applies to Intelligent Peripheral Equipment that support the Supervised Analog Line feature only. Disconnect supervision is not provided to the terminal device if the Meridian 1 does not receive any indication of the far end releasing.
PAGE 62
Page 1020 of 3156 China – Supervised Analog Lines • The Off-Premise Station Line Card NT1R20AB or later vintage, and • The Off-Premise Station Line Card for China NTRA06AB or later vintage. Hook flash disconnect supervision is supported on the following cards: • The Off-Premise Station Line Card NT1R20AB or later vintage, and • The Off-Premise Station Line Card for China NTRA06AB or later vintage.
PAGE 63
China – Supervised Analog Lines Page 1021 of 3156 Conference If a terminal device answers an incoming call and then initiates a conference, no battery reversal answer supervision signal is extended to the terminal device when new parties of the conference answer. However, a hook flash disconnect supervision signal is extended to the terminal device when the last party in the conference disconnects.
PAGE 64
Page 1022 of 3156 China – Supervised Analog Lines LD 10 – Enable battery reversal supervision. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add, or change. TYPE: 500 Telephone type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. Terminal Number for the Option 11C. OSP (1) Outgoing call supervision. Answer and disconnect supervision for outgoing calls with absolute and assumed answer indication. If the numeric parameter is not entered and the saved value is null, it is defaulted to 1. Otherwise it remains unchanged.
PAGE 65
China – Supervised Analog Lines Page 1023 of 3156 Note: Respond to the FTR prompt in LD 10 with OSP 1, and then with ISP 1...(75)...255 to enable both battery reversal supervision and hook flash disconnect supervision. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 66
Page 1024 of 3156 553-3001-306 China – Supervised Analog Lines Standard 10.
PAGE 67
Page 1025 of 3156 China – Toll Call Loss Plan Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 68
Page 1026 of 3156 China – Toll Call Loss Plan The outgoing toll call is recognized by defining the toll digits as a Special Service List number in overlay 18 and specifying it in the DTI2 Route Data Block. For incoming calls, the toll status is provided by the Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) signaling. When the toll status is determined, the appropriate pad values are used on the DTI2 card and 500/2500 line card.
PAGE 69
China – Toll Call Loss Plan Page 1027 of 3156 Conference Toll Loss Plan is not supported when a conference is in progress. When a local party connecting to a toll call makes a conference call, the pad levels on the ONS line card are switched back to their original (non-toll call) values. Then, the existing Conference algorithm takes care of the necessary pad switching. This would not alter the existing conference call in terms of loss levels.
PAGE 70
Page 1028 of 3156 China – Toll Call Loss Plan In addition the China – Toll Call Loss Plan feature requires: • Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128 • 2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129 • International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 for the Special Service List functionality. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 18 – Define toll digits for China. 1028.
PAGE 71
China – Toll Call Loss Plan Page 1029 of 3156 LD 16 – Enter the SSL number (defined in LD 18) in the Route Data Block of the DTI2 trunk. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add, or change. TYPE RDB Route Data Block 1-15 Enter the SSL number defined in LD 18. ... SSL LD 73 – Enter the pad codes for a toll call on DTI2. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG PRT Add, change, or print. TYPE DTI2 2.0 Mbps DTI data block. FEAT PAD Pad category. PDCA 1-16 Pad category table.
PAGE 72
Page 1030 of 3156 553-3001-306 China – Toll Call Loss Plan Standard 10.
PAGE 73
Page 1031 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-release 24 functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release 24 enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gateways Enhancement feature functionality (Release 24) . . . . . . .
PAGE 74
Page 1032 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Feature description This document covers the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements features. It describes pre-release 24 operation and explains how each feature is enhanced in Release 24. The features are presented together because they share many common characteristics.
PAGE 75
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1033 of 3156 Pre-release 24 functionality Pre-release 24 common operation The ANI DN is: • the primary DN if originator is a set with Class of Service DNAA. • the LDN0 if originator is an attendant with Class of Service DNAA. • the ANDN configured on outgoing route if the originator is a set or an attendant with Class of Service DNAD.
PAGE 76
Page 1034 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Figure 16 Example of ANI built from a set or an attendant console (pre-release 24) DNAA LECogt + DN of set + (ADDGogt) Class of service DNAA or DNAD LECogt + ANDNogt + (ADDGogt) DNAD DNAA LECogt + LDNO + (ADDGogt) Prompt DNAN DNAD LECOgt + ANDNogt + (ADDGogt) 553-8476 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 77
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1035 of 3156 CIS Gateways Enhancements Pre-Release 24 operation ANI sent in gateway case is built as follows in pre-release 24 operation (see Figure 17). 1 LEC ogt route + ADDG ogt route + part of received Calling Number or, when Calling number not available (see Note) 2 LEC ogt route + ADDG ogt route + ANDN inc. route or, when ANDN of incoming route not available 3 LEC ogt route + ADDG ogt route + ANDN ogt route.
PAGE 78
Page 1036 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Release 24 enhancements Shared functionality When configuring outgoing CIS routes, the feature is activated using the prompt ANIC to enable composition of a new ANI. Two similar ANI tables are configured in the customer data block. One is used when call is originated from a set. The second table is used when call is originated from a route. Up to 2000 entries can be configured in the ANI table for sets.
PAGE 79
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1037 of 3156 ANI Digits Manipulation feature functionality (Release 24) The ANI may be built in two ways with the enhancements introduced by the CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature as described in the list below (see Figure 18): 1 The ANI may be built the same manner as it was before Release 24, with some modifications listed below.
PAGE 80
Page 1038 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Figure 18 Example of how ANI is built in call originating from a set (using enhanced functionality) ANIC configured on outgoing route NO see previous figure YES ANIE of calling party 0 or refers to an entry NOT configured for customer see previous figure refers to an entry configured for the customer DNLG = 0 Yes LEC entry + (ADDGentry) + ANDN entry No LEC entry + (ADDGentry) + DN of calling party 553-8472 553-3001-306 S
PAGE 81
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1039 of 3156 Example 1 - DN on key 1 is to be used in ANI Table 31 DN on key 1 is to be used in ANI ANI entry Entry X Entry Y DNLG, length of DN to use in ANI 4 0 LEC, Local Exchange Code 940 940 ADDG, additional digits 89 8 ANDN, used as ANI DN if DNLG is 0 7676 Example 2 - DN on key 1 is not to be used in ANI Table 32 DN on key 1 is not to be used in ANI ANI entry Entry X Entry Y DNLG, length of DN to use in ANI 4 0 LEC, Loca
PAGE 82
Page 1040 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Gateways Enhancement feature functionality (Release 24) The gateway enhancements are composed of the following new functionalities, which are described in this section: • Mapping of the received calling number to ANI: — Mapping CNI to ANI, ANI to CNI — Mapping CLID to ANI and OLI to ANI — Mapping ANI to ANI in gateway CIS to CIS • Building ANI for interfaces without calling number Mapping of the received calling number to ANI To m
PAGE 83
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1041 of 3156 With Release 24 implementation, ANI is built as follows: If outgoing route does not allow use of ANI table entry assigned on incoming route (ANIC prompt of outgoing CIS route is set to NO), Calling number is built as before. Notice that part of the received Calling Number (DNLG) and ANDN INC route are configured in ANI table entry of the incoming route.
PAGE 84
Page 1042 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements On the gateway side of the R2MFC to CIS, the purpose of this mapping is to convert the 10 MFC CAC meanings into CIS CAC meanings, or to define a default CIS CAC value. For this, a conversion table is defined. Conversion tables are defined in overlay 15. Up to 32 tables can be configured. A conversion table can be assigned on each MFC route. For this, the prompt CAC_CONV is added to the MFC incoming route configuration.
PAGE 85
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1043 of 3156 Table 33 CAC conversion table entry 0 for R2MFC route MFC CAC CIS CAC CIS CAC description CAC0 3 CIS value corresponding to MFC CAC DGT0 CAC1 3 CIS value corresponding to MFC CAC DGT1 ....
PAGE 86
Page 1044 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements CAC conversion tables must be defined by the craftsperson in overlay 15. Up to 32 tables can be configured. Then a configured conversion table entry can be assigned on each incoming DTI2 CIS route. For this, new prompt CAC_CONV is added to the CIS incoming route configuration. If no CAC conversion table is configured on the CIS route, the default table entry number 0 will apply on CIS incoming routes.
PAGE 87
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1045 of 3156 Table 34 CAC Conversion table entry 0 for CIS incoming DTI2 route (Part 2 of 2) CIS CAC MFC CAC Description and CIS CAC meaning CAC5 0 MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 5 “Business subset of telecommunications administration with the access to automatic regional, toll, international network and to special service numbers free of charge” CAC6 0 MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 6 “Toll Coin box and public call paystation with
PAGE 88
Page 1046 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements In the pre-Release 24 implementation, on incoming route the length of Calling Number tandemed and a default DN are defined using, respectively, prompt RDNL and prompt ANDN. These two prompts RDNL and ANDN are suppressed and replaced by prompt ANIE which allows configuring ANI table entry.
PAGE 89
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1047 of 3156 Examples of Gateways Enhancements The following pages contain examples of how to implement gateways enhancements. Table 35 CAC conversion table, entry 1 content MFC CAC CIS CAC CAC0 9 CAC1 8 CAC2 7 CAC3 6 CAC4 5 CAC5 4 CAC6 3 CAC7 2 CAC8 1 CAC9 0 Default 3 Example 1 - Gateway call through node 3 to CO C In this example, Received CNI on route 320 is 1234, with CAC translated to DGT5.
PAGE 90
Page 1048 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Example 2 - Gateway call through node 2 to CO B In this example, received CNI on route 230 is 647678, with CAC translated to DGT 8. Outgoing ANI is 555 123 7678 1. Table 37 Example 2 - Detail of built CAC LEC Incoming 555 Additional digit 123 DNLG*CNI 7678 Category Code 1 Example 3 - Gateway call through node 1 to CO A In this example, received CLID on route 120 is 25. Outgoing ANI is 444 123456123 25 5.
PAGE 91
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1049 of 3156 The ANI size flexibility is not supported by the analog trunks (E3W, X3W). For these type of trunks, the prompt ANSZ (Overlay 16) must be answered with seven. CIS standards recommend setting ANSZ to seven for CIS DTI2 ANSZ prompt. CIS Gateways Enhancements operating parameters ANI is downloaded to the card only once and immediately after trunk seizure.
PAGE 92
Page 1050 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements There is no cross checking of the CAC Conversion table entries associated with a CIS or R2MFC route against the CAC Conversion table in the customer Data Block.
PAGE 93
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1051 of 3156 • The additional digit(s) is(are) inserted between LEC and ANI DN when necessary to complete the ANI DN. • Prompt ANIC (ANI Composing) added in Overlay 16 is also used in CIS Gateways Enhancements. CIS Gateways Enhancements feature interactions CIS Three Wire Trunk Analog This development interacts with the feature CIS Three Wire Trunk Analog by changing how ANI is built in case of gateway from ISDN/DPNSS/R2MFC to CIS Analog.
PAGE 94
Page 1052 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements CIS Analog Three Wire Trunks feature requires: • International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 • Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160 • Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125 • Trunk Fail Monitor (TFM) package 182 • Meridian 1 IPE package (XPE) package 203 (required for outgoing X3W packs) • Fast Tone and Digit Switch (FAST_TDS) package 87 (required for outgoing E3W package) CIS ANI Digits Manipulatio
PAGE 95
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1053 of 3156 11 LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry and CAC conversion table for Incoming CIS DTI2 route. 12 LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry for all other route types (ISDN, incoming CIS analog, incoming DTI2 and DPNSS). 13 LD 88 - Configure the CAC for CIS signaling. LD 15 - Configure ANI Table for telephones Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data TYPE: ANI Automatic Number Identification ...
PAGE 96
Page 1054 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements - S_ENTRY aa ANI entry for a set to be created or modified. Xaa ANI entry for a set to be deleted. Xaa Xbb ANI entries (aa-bb) for a set to be deleted. Prompted only if S_SIZE is greater than 0. ANI entries must be between 1 and S_SIZE. If REQ=NEW, this prompt and its subprompts are given only once. If REQ=CHG, they are repeated until S_ENTRY is answered with . - - DNLG 0-(4)-15 Directory Number Length. - - LEC 0-99...
PAGE 97
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1055 of 3156 CISR YES (NO) CIS Route - ANSZ (7)-15 ANI information size. Response is length of LEC+ANI DN. For analog routes, the only valid response is seven (7). - ANIC (NO) YES ANI Composing Prompted for outgoing CIS route.
PAGE 98
Page 1056 of 3156 - ADDG CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements 0-(8)-99...99 Additional digits used in ANI message if ANIC is NO or if ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the originator of the call is not configured. It is used to complete ANI DN if LEC+ANI DN consists of less than ANSZ digits. Prompted for outgoing CIS route. It can be from 1 digit long up to ANSZ digit long. - ANDN 0-99...99 Default ANI DN. It can be from 0 digit long up to ANSZ digit long.
PAGE 99
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1057 of 3156 - VMB aaaa Voice Mailbox. - ANIE (0)-N ANI Entry: it is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block. If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the set. The old mechanism will be used for building the ANI message. If ANIE is of 1-N: ... ... • If ANIC = YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the components of the ANI message are retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer Data Block, if configured.
PAGE 100
Page 1058 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements LD 11 - Configure ANI entry for Meridian 1 proprietary sets. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Add new data. CHG Change existing data. TYPE: xxxx Meridian 1 proprietary set. TN lscu cu Terminal number for Options 51C through 81C. Terminal number for Option 11C CUST xx Customer number. xx = 0 - 99 for Options 51C through 81C. xx = 0 - 31 for Option 11C. ... ... ... KEY xx AAA yyyy... ccc xx = key number.
PAGE 101
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements - VMB aaaa Voice Mailbox. - ANIE (0)-N ANI Entry: Page 1059 of 3156 It is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block. If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the DN key. The old mechanism will be used for building the ANI message. If ANIE is of 1-N:. • If ANIC=YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the components of the ANI message are retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer Data Block, if configured.
PAGE 102
Page 1060 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements LD 27 - Configure ANI entry for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) lines. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW Add new data. CHG Change existing data. TYPE TSP Administer Terminal Service Profile on Digital Subscriber Loop. ... ... ... SPID xxxx Service Profile ID. DN xxxx ccc Directory Number (DN) and Calling Line Identification (CLID) entry. xxxx = DN ccc = CLID - CT aaaa Call Types for DN aaaa = VCE or DTA.
PAGE 103
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1061 of 3156 - PRES (YES) NO Allow/Deny Presentation of CLID to far end on outgoing calls. - ANIE (0)-N ANI entry. It is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block. If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the DN key. The old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
PAGE 104
Page 1062 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements CIS Gateways Enhancements feature implementation This section contains the overlay procedures required to configure the CIS Gateways Enhancements feature. Feature implementation for R2MFC route In case of gateway R2MFC/CIS it must be noticed that to be tandemed CNI must be received on R2MFC route before outgoing CIS trunk is seized. This is possible using an up-front CNI request.
PAGE 105
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements - R_ENTRY Page 1063 of 3156 aa ANI entry for an incoming route to be created or modified. Xaa ANI entry for an incoming route to be deleted. Xaa Xbb ANI entries for an incoming route between aa and bb to be deleted. Exit. R_ENTRY is repeated until is entered. ANI entries must be between 0 and (R_SIZE-1). For REQ=NEW, only default table 0 is configurable. An R_ENTRY can be deleted even if still assigned on an incoming route.
PAGE 106
Page 1064 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements -MFC_ENT CAC conversion table to convert MFC CAC into CIS CAC for use on R2MFC routes. aa CAC conversion table entry to be created or modified. Xaa CAC conversion table entry to be deleted. Xaa Xbb CAC conversion table entries between aa and bb to be deleted. Exit MFC CAC conversion table, gives CIS_ENT prompt. This prompt is repeated until is entered. It is prompted if CACC=YES.
PAGE 107
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1065 of 3156 LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry in the Route Data Block for incoming R2MFC route. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW Add new data. TYPE RDB Route Data Block. ... ... ... MFC YES Configure Multifrequency Compelled signaling. - MFCI x MFC Incoming Table. - MFCO x MFC Outgoing Table. ... ... ICOG IAO Incoming and Outgoing. INC Incoming.
PAGE 108
Page 1066 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry and CAC conversion table for Incoming CIS DTI2 route. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW Add new data. TYPE RDB Route data block ... ... ... DGTP DTI2 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface. ... ... ICOG INC Incoming route. ... ... ... ANIE (0)-x ANI table Entry for Route (configured under prompt R_ENTRY, OVL 15). x = R_SIZE-1.
PAGE 109
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements Page 1067 of 3156 LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry for all other route types (ISDN, incoming CIS analog, incoming DTI2 and DPNSS). Prompt Response Description REQ NEW Add new data. TYPE RDB Route Data Block. ... ... ISDN YES Enable ISDN ... ... ... ICOG IAO Incoming and outgoing. ICT Incoming. ... ... ANIE (0)-x ANI table Entry for Route (configured under prompt R_ENTRY, LD 15). x= R_SIZE-1.
PAGE 110
Page 1068 of 3156 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements LD 88 - Configure the CAC for CIS signaling. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE AUB Authcode Data Block ... ... ... CLAS (0)-115 Classcode value assigned to authcode (NAUT). ... ... ... NCOS (0)-99 Network Class of Service group number. CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9 CIS ANI category code. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 111
Page 1085 of 3156 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 112
Page 1086 of 3156 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection The criteria is composed as a combination of two events: dial tone detection and ANI interaction. It may include only dial tone detection, only ANI Interaction, dial tone or ANI, dial tone and ANI. The criteria is defined at the route data block level. The detection is performed by the CIS DTI2 cards (NTCG01AC and NTCG02 AC) and when the criteria is satisfied the Meridian 1 receives a report from the card.
PAGE 113
CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection Page 1087 of 3156 Figure 24 Indirect outgoing toll call with dial tone detection Meridian 1 Software CDTI2 Firmware SEIZE User dials ACOD of the CIS trunk followed by Toll ACOD and some international DN. SEIZE ACK TOll ACOD digits ATO timer is started. Toll CO SEIZE SEIZE ACK Toll indication +outpulse criteria Local CO SEIZE TOLL ACOD digits Start the Dial Tone detection if it is required by the TOLL Outpulsing Criteria.
PAGE 114
Page 1088 of 3156 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection Figure 25 Direct toll call with dial tone detection Meridian 1 Software User dials ACOD of the Outgoing Toll CIS trunk followed by some international DN. CDTI2 Firmware SEIZE Send SEIZE to CO Direct Toll ind. + outpulse criteria ATO timer is started. SEIZE ACK Outpulse ready report DN digit #1 DN digit #2 DN digit #3 SEIZE SEIZE ACK Start the Dial Tone detection if it is required by the Toll Outpulsing Criteria.
PAGE 115
CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection Page 1089 of 3156 Operating parameters This feature requires the CIS DTI2 card NTCG01AC for Options 51C - 81C. Card NTCG02AC is used in Option 11C. These CIS DTI2 cards have increased functionality that allows detection of the CIS toll dial tone.
PAGE 116
Page 1090 of 3156 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection LD 73 - Add Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as a CIS firmware type. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change existing data. TYPE DTI2 Digital Trunk Interface loops. FEAT LPTI Loop timers and additional definitions. CDTI2 YES CDTI2/CSDTI2 card ... ... CISFW MFA 553-3001-306 Standard 10.00 Multifrequency Shuttle protocol handling + ANI Reception + firmware dial tone detection capabilities are supported.
PAGE 117
CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection Page 1091 of 3156 LD 16 - Specify CIS route information. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE RDB Route Data Block. TKTP COT Central Office Trunk ... ... ... ICOG OGT Outgoing only trunk. ... ... ... CNTL (NO) YES Deny/Allow changes to controls or timers. - TIMR ATO 128-(4992)-65408 ANI timeout timer in milliseconds.
PAGE 118
Page 1092 of 3156 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 119
Page 1093 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure CND Class of Service on CLASS sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date and time stamp information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling number information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling name information . .. . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 120
Page 1094 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Feature description The Custom Local Area Signaling Service (CLASS) Calling Number and Name Delivery (CND) feature enables the Meridian 1 system to send the calling number and/or calling name to a CLASS set when a call is presented to it, per the Bellcore CLASS CND standard. Once the Meridian 1 delivers the CLASS CND information, it is completely up to the CLASS set to determine how the information is to be displayed.
PAGE 121
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1095 of 3156 Figure 26 System allocation when a CLASS set is idle Set A (any set, DN=7833, Name=John Smith) Meridian 1 Idle Set B (Type=500, CLS=CNUA) Idle CMOD unit 0 Idle XCMC PRI IPE pack CMOD unit 31 Idle 553-7461.
PAGE 122
Page 1096 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Figure 27 System resource allocation when a new call begins to ring on the CLASS set Set A (any set, DN=7833, Name=John Smith) Meridian 1 Calls set B and hears ring-back Set B (Type=500, CLS=CNUA) Begins to ring CMOD unit 0 XCMC PRI IPE pack Collects originator's CND information and waits for the CND delivery interval. CMOD unit 31 Idle 553-7462.EPS 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 123
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1097 of 3156 Figure 28 System resource allocation during the CND delivery interval Set A (any set, DN=7833, Name=John Smith) Meridian 1 Continues to hear ring-back Set B (Type=500, CLS=CNUA) Ring temporarily turned off CMOD unit 0 XCMC PRI IPE pack Delivers CND information to the CLASS set. CMOD unit 31 Idle 553-7463.
PAGE 124
Page 1098 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Figure 29 System resource allocation after the CND delivery interval Set A (any set, DN=7833, Name=John Smith) Meridian 1 Continues to hear ring-back Set B (Type=500, CLS=CNUA) Resumes ringing The call number and name of set A is diplayed CMOD unit 0 Idle XCMC PRI IPE pack 553-7464.EPS 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 125
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1099 of 3156 Configure CND Class of Service on CLASS sets In Overlay 10, the system administrator may configure a CLASS set to deliver both Calling Number Delivery, Calling Name Delivery, or both.
PAGE 126
Page 1100 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Calling number information For a non-ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to the CLASS set will be the incoming In-Band ANI, or if no ANI is passed on, then the calling number unknown indicator 1 is delivered in place of the calling number.
PAGE 127
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1101 of 3156 • If the CLID entry of the originating DN specifies that it is to be identified by its national number (CLASS_FMT=NTN in Overlay 15), then the national public number associated with the originating DN1 is delivered (if the number is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 will be delivered). • If the originating set is assigned with an undefined CLID entry, then the originating DN is delivered.
PAGE 128
Page 1102 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Calling name information For a non-ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling name unknown indicator 1 is delivered to the CLASS set in place of the calling name. For an ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling name delivered to the CLASS set will be the calling name received from the incoming ISDN trunk (if the calling name is longer than 15 characters, only the first 15 will be delivered).
PAGE 129
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1103 of 3156 Network engineering for CLASS sets In a Meridian 1 system with a single group network, the network internal blocking is determined by the concentration ratio of equipped ports on peripheral equipment and the number of interfaced loops or superloops. Depending on traffic engineering, a non-blocking network is achievable. In a multi-group system, intergroup junctors are required to switch calls between two network groups.
PAGE 130
Page 1104 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Meridian 1 multi-group network This section is only relevant to a Meridian 1 multi-group network. A single group Meridian 1 system does not have inter-group junctors. Therefore, special engineering on junctor is not applicable. The Option 11C has a network architecture different from the rest of Meridian 1 Options.
PAGE 131
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1105 of 3156 Figure 30 A Meridian 1 system with a two-group network Group 0 Group 1 1 1 A Terminal Loops 8 Inter-group Junctors B Terminal Loops 8 x 30 channels 28 CMOD 28 CMOD 553-7395.EPS Note that traffic to a CLASS set can be originated from a non-CLASS set, another CLASS set or an incoming trunk.
PAGE 132
Page 1106 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery CLASS feature operation A call originated from Set A (or trunk A) seeks to terminate on a CLASS set B. When B starts to ring, A will hear ringback. A unit in CMOD (CLASS Modem) is assigned to collect originator’s CND information and waits for the CND delivery interval. After the first ring at B, a silence period (deliver interval) ensues, the CMOD unit begins to deliver CND information to the CLASS set.
PAGE 133
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1107 of 3156 In order for the connection between a CMOD unit and the remote set (on a different group) to meet the Grade Of Service (GOS) of Meridian 1 for internal call setup, traffic on the loop and inter-group junctor should meet normal GOS requirements, that is 660 CCS per loop or junctor. If we let an inter-group junctor be loaded to 660 CCS like a loop, the total allowed traffic at eight junctors is 5280 CCS (=660x8).
PAGE 134
Page 1108 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Table 38 Meridian 1 maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation) No. of Groups Sets/Group 2 1760 3 2933 4 3520 5 4080 Note: Convert a trunk or an agent set to four equivalent sets before applying Table 38. A single group system can have as many CLASS sets as each loop allows. The engineering of Meridian 1 is not different from that of non-CLASS sets, since there is no inter-group junctor involved.
PAGE 135
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1109 of 3156 If a group comprises of both regular sets and CLASS sets, the total number of sets in the group should not exceed the quoted number in the table. If trunks and agent sets are included in the group, convert them to “equivalent sets” before using Table 38. More details are described in the engineering guide. Table 39 shows the CMOD capacity.
PAGE 136
Page 1110 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery CLAS S Set 2339 2436 2437 2535 2536 2635 2637 2735 2736 2835 2836 2936 2937 3037 3038 3139 CMO D Unit 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CLAS S Set 3140 3241 3242 3344 3345 3447 3448 3550 3551 3653 3654 3757 3768 3861 3862 3966 CMO D Unit 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 CLAS S Set 3967 4070 4071 4175 4176 4281 4282 4386 4387 4492 4493 4598 4599 4704 4705 4811 CMO D Unit 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 CLAS S Set 4812 491
PAGE 137
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1111 of 3156 General engineering guidelines Non-Call Center applications In a non-call center application, there is no significant number of agent sets. Therefore, no agent set to regular set conversion is needed. The only type of port requiring special treatment is trunk.
PAGE 138
Page 1112 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Re-configuration may be required (when engineering rules are not fully followed) When above rule (2) can not be satisfied in a new site or an existing one, the following guidelines are designed to minimize network blocking, and to determine whether a re-configuration (to move trunks and sets around) or to provide an XCMC pack per group is necessary.
PAGE 139
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1113 of 3156 One XCMC pack serving a 2-group system 1 Example 1: No re-configuration A 2-group Meridian 1 system serving an office is expected to convert 400 analog sets to CLASS sets. Currently, 100 of them are located in group 0, where all incoming trunks are located, and the remaining 300 sets are in group 1. Assume that group 1 is also equipped with 800 non-CLASS sets.
PAGE 140
Page 1114 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery 2 Example 2: Re-configuration A similar application as in the last example, except that there are 1600 non-CLASS sets and 100 trunks in group 1. Solution: The same number of CMOD units (10), since the number of CLASS sets in the system is the same. The number of total equivalent sets in group 1 is 2300 (=1600 +300 +100x4) which is greater than the 1760 threshold in the Table 38 for a 2group system.
PAGE 141
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1115 of 3156 3 Equip CLASS agent sets in the group where trunks carrying incoming traffic to agent sets are located. 4 Equip non-agent CLASS sets in the same group as the agent CLASS sets. 5 Equip the XCMC IPE pack on the network group with CLASS sets. If the system is a single group system, or if above rules are fully met, no further engineering is necessary.
PAGE 142
Page 1116 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery 8 9 If the number of equivalent set is greater than the threshold, one or all of the following engineering rules should be followed to reduce junctor traffic: a Move sets (CLASS or non-CLASS) or trunks to another group to satisfy the above engineering rules. b Equip XCMC pack in more than one group to serve local CLASS set traffic.
PAGE 143
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1117 of 3156 One XCMC pack serving a 2-group system 1 Example 1: No re-configuration required A two-group Meridian 1 system serving a call center is expected to upgrade 300 analog sets (100 administrative sets and 200 agent sets) to CLASS sets. The 100 administrative sets are located in group 0, where are also located all incoming trunks. The 200 agent sets are in group 1, which will continue to be used as agent sets after upgrading.
PAGE 144
Page 1118 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery 2 Example 2: Re-configuration required A similar application as in the last example, but there are 1600 nonCLASS sets in group 1. Solution: The same number of CMOD units (17) is required, since the number of equivalent CLASS sets (900) in the system is the same. Equip the 17 CMOD units in group 1, since the XCMC pack should be equipped in the group with most CLASS (equivalent) sets.
PAGE 145
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery 3 Page 1119 of 3156 Example 3: Mixed sets, trunks in both groups and re-configuration required A two-group Meridian 1 system serving a call center is expected to equip 200 administrative CLASS sets in group 0 and 400 CLASS agent sets in group 1. 500 trunks carrying incoming traffic to agents are located in group 0, 60 trunks serving local CO non-ACD traffic are equipped in group 1. Assume that group 1 is also equipped with 300 non-CLASS sets.
PAGE 146
Page 1120 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery One XCMC pack serving a 3-5 group system Chances of groups larger than three requiring special engineering are slim, since the threshold (Table 38) limiting the number of sets per group is much higher. If the rule of co-locating CLASS sets and CMOD units in the same group is not fully met, as long as basic rule like putting XCMC pack in the group with most CLASS sets is followed, perhaps, no re-configuration between any two groups is necessary.
PAGE 147
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1121 of 3156 Operating parameters Dialed Number Identification System (DNIS) is not supported by the CLASS feature. This feature has been developed for the North American residential market, as well as for the small business, hospitality, schools and universities, nursing homes and hospitals, and mobile home markets.
PAGE 148
Page 1122 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Due to firmware limitations on some types of CLASS sets, after a call has been disconnected, the CND information associated with the disconnected call may still appear on the CLASS set’s display for several seconds. During this time, the CLASS set cannot display new CND information. Though the Meridian 1 delivers the CND information pertaining to a new call, there is no guarantee that the CLASS set will display the delivered information.
PAGE 149
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1123 of 3156 Calling Line Identification Restriction for ISDN BRI sets When an ISDN BRI set, with Calling Line Identification Restriction active, makes a nodal call to a CLASS set with Calling Name Delivery active, the calling name privacy indicator will be delivered as the calling name. Conference/No Hold Conference When a set initiates a conference call to a CLASS set, the Calling Name and Number of the initiating set is delivered to the CLASS set.
PAGE 150
Page 1124 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery • For a station (set or attendant) making a call to a CLASS set, if the national number is to be delivered to the CLASS set as the calling number of the calling station, then the Meridian 1 software will pad or truncate the calling number to be exactly 10 digits long.
PAGE 151
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1125 of 3156 • If no ANI is passed on, then the calling number unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling number. • Otherwise, the incoming Feature Group D trunk ANI is directly delivered.
PAGE 152
Page 1126 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery • If no calling name is passed on by the incoming trunk, then the calling name unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling name. • Otherwise, the calling name received from the incoming ISDN trunk is directly delivered. If the calling name is longer than 15 characters, only the first 15 will be delivered.
PAGE 153
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery Page 1127 of 3156 When an incoming VNS trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling Name Delivery active, the calling name delivered to the CLASS set will be one of the following: • If the calling name is defined as presentation denied (the originating set has a Display Name Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line Identification Restriction active), then the calling name privacy indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.
PAGE 154
Page 1128 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery LD 15 - Configure the CLASS CLID parameters in the Customer Data Block. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change or delete existing data. TYPE: NET Networking data. CUST xx Customer number. ... CLID CLID option. YES NO = (the default) do not configure a CLID table. In this case, the remaining prompts are not generated, and no CLID is sent for the customer. YES = configure a CLID table for the customer.
PAGE 155
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery ENTRY aaaa SAVED ENTRY aaaa DELETED ENTRIES aaaa-bbbb DELETED Page 1129 of 3156 Displayed message. Refer to the ENTRY prompt description. ... Note 1: You may print the CLASS_FMT information included in the CLID using LD 21. Note 2: You may print or count the station sets class of service using LD 81. This information would typically be used for billing purposes, to bill set users for calls according to the assigned class of service.
PAGE 156
Page 1130 of 3156 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery CLS ... LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may be configured per Meridian 1 system). Note: While no new ISM limit is introduced by the CLASS feature, each CLASS modem unit TN is counted against the system TN limit and is reflected in the overlay banner. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data Change existing data. TYPE CMOD CLASS modem unit.
PAGE 157
Page 1131 of 3156 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 158
Page 1132 of 3156 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator The visual indication message (an “ON/OFF” CLASS VMWI specific message) is delivered from the Meridian 1 to the CLASS sets using Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) signaling based on Bellcore specifications, via a CLASS modem (CMOD) unit. The CMOD units are configured using LD 13. Once configured, the CMOD units are shared throughout a multicustomer Meridian 1 system.
PAGE 159
CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator Page 1133 of 3156 If a CLASS set is in the middle of receiving a VMWI message, and the CLASS set goes off-hook: • the VMWI message will be aborted. The CLASS set is checked every 10 seconds, for up to 2 1/2 hours, until the set is detected to be idle. At that time, the system will immediately deliver the VMWI message.
PAGE 160
Page 1134 of 3156 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator Figure 31 CLASS set is in idle state XCMC PRI IPE pack 553-8244 Figure 32 CLASS VMWI ON message in the process of being delivered to the CLASS set XCMC PRI IPE pack 553-8245 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 161
CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator Page 1135 of 3156 Figure 33 CLASS VMWI has been delivered to the CLASS set XCMC PRI IPE pack 553-8246 Features and Services
PAGE 162
Page 1136 of 3156 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator Operating parameters This feature has been developed for the North American residential market, as well as for the small business, hospitality, schools and universities, nursing homes and hospitals, and mobile home markets.
PAGE 163
CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator Page 1137 of 3156 Lamp audit does not apply to the CLASS VMWI feature. There is a 2 1/2 hours time limit for a retry in the case of a pending message. Up to 255 CLASS modem units can be configured on a Meridian 1 system, and up to 32 CLASS modem units can be configured on any Extended CLASS Modem card.
PAGE 164
Page 1138 of 3156 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator In addition, the CLASS VMWI feature can interwork with Stuttered Dial Tone. The Stuttered Dial Tone functionality (which is part of the Flexible Tones and Cadences feature) provides an audible indication, rather than a visual one, that a message is waiting. It is configured separately from the CLASS VMWI feature, using the Class of Service (CLS) prompt in LD 10. If the LPA (Lamp Allowed) response is entered, then a CLASS visual indication is sent.
PAGE 165
CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator Page 1139 of 3156 Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 10 - Configure a CLASS set as an analog (500/2500 type) set, and configure the required Class of Service for the set. 2 LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may be configured per Meridian 1 system).
PAGE 166
Page 1140 of 3156 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator ... LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may be configured per Meridian 1 system). Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data Change existing data. TYPE CMOD CLASS modem unit. DMOD 1-127 Default Model number for this route TN lscu Modem unit Terminal Number for Options 51C, 61C,81C, where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit. cu For Option 11C, where c = card, u = unit.
PAGE 167
1148 Page 1141 of 3156 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID) Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 168
Page 1142 of 3156 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID) The A-CLID information is treated similar to ISDN CLID for delivery to other modules and applications in the system, including the display on digital telephones and consoles at the local node and other network nodes (if any). You can enable or disable A-CLID on an individual trunk port basis.
PAGE 169
CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID) Page 1143 of 3156 Figure 34 System structure for CLID delivery Features and Services
PAGE 170
Page 1144 of 3156 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID) Table 40 shows the display format for different combinations of analog CLI information. If you do not receive the calling number (“P” or “O” is received as the reason for absence), the display shows the P/O route access code number and member number. If you do not receive the calling name (“P” or ”O” is received as the reason for absence), then the display shows “PRIVATE” or ”UNAVAILABLE”.
PAGE 171
CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID) Page 1145 of 3156 Operating parameters The A-CLID feature is only for incoming loop start trunks (both supervised and non-supervised) in Hong Kong. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks do not support the A-CLID feature. A-CLID requires one mode: On-hook data transmission with ring. If you initialize the system while the CLID information is transferring from the DXUT-A card to software: • you lose all CLID information not sent.
PAGE 172
Page 1146 of 3156 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID) This feature does not change the functionality of R2-MFC trunks. R2-MFC trunks display the route access code number when the CLI information is not available, and not the member number. If the system receives unrecognized messages or parameter types, the call terminates without displaying the CLID (“UNAVAILABLE” and “O-Route access code number - Member number” for name and number displays).
PAGE 173
CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID) Page 1147 of 3156 Information Notification Service for Japan The A-CLID feature does not work with the Information Notification Service for Japan (INS-J) feature. Private Line Service A-CLID information does display on the telephone. Feature packaging This feature requires Analog Calling Line Identification (ACLI) package 349 Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 14 – Configure analog CLI.
PAGE 174
Page 1148 of 3156 .... CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID) .... CLS CLIA (CLID) .... Class of Service options for trunks. Calling Line Identification Allowed Calling Line Identification Denied (default) .... Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 175
Page 1149 of 3156 Collect Call Blocking Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 176
Page 1150 of 3156 Collect Call Blocking Classes of Service and prompts have been introduced to inhibit specific users from receiving collect DID and Central Office calls. These can be configured for the following: • analog (500/2500 type) telephones and Meridian 1 proprietary telephones through the Collect Call Blocking Allowed/Denied (CCBA/ CCBD) Class of Service. • Attendant and Network Alternate Route Selection calls on a per customer basis through CCBA/CCBD option.
PAGE 177
Collect Call Blocking Page 1151 of 3156 Figure 35 Collect Call Blocking answer signal compared to regular answer signal Regular Answer Signal Off-hook On-hook Collect Call Blocking Answer Signal Off-hook On-hook CCB1 delay CCB2 delay Operating parameters The Collect Call Blocking feature supports both analog and DTI2 trunks, and the following Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) cards: • the NTCK16BB Extended Flexible COT Trunk Card (XFCOT) with firmware flash timing • the NT8D14BA Enhanced Exten
PAGE 178
Page 1152 of 3156 Collect Call Blocking If a CCB user answers a call from a CO/DID route with Collect Call Blocking activated, the CCB answer signal is sent to the CO for all incoming DID and CO calls. For analog trunks, the user will experience clicking on the line and a temporary break is speechpath (0.5 to 2.5 seconds) while the CCB answer signal is being sent.
PAGE 179
Collect Call Blocking Page 1153 of 3156 Feature interactions Automatic Answerback The Automatic Answerback (AAB) feature, when assigned to a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, allows any incoming call to a single-appearance Prime Directory Number (PDN) to be answered automatically. If an incoming DID or CO call terminates on a set with the AAB feature enabled, the call is automatically answered after one ring.
PAGE 180
Page 1154 of 3156 Collect Call Blocking Autoterminate If an incoming DID or CO call from an autoterminate trunk terminates on a set or ACD queue with a CCBA Class of Service, the CCB answer signal is provided in place of the regular answer signal. Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Sets For BRI sets CCBA/CCBD Class of Service cannot be programmed. Therefore, it is not possible to prevent BRI sets from accepting DDC collect calls.
PAGE 181
Collect Call Blocking Page 1155 of 3156 If some of the mail boxes are allowed to receive collect calls, this may be a problem. A possible solution is to configure two ACD queues on the Meridian 1 to access Meridian Mail. One queue would have collect calls allowed and the second queue would have collect calls denied. Network Automatic Call Distribution The answer signal returned to the CO for a network ACD call from a route with CCB enabled is determined by the source ACD queue.
PAGE 182
Page 1156 of 3156 Collect Call Blocking Feature packaging Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290 must be provisioned to activate this feature. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 16 – Enable Collect Call Blocking on a route and configure timers. 2 LD 14 – Setup the firmware timing for XFCOT and EXUT cards. 3 LD 15 – Allow Collect Call Blocking for attendants.
PAGE 183
Collect Call Blocking M911_ANI Page 1157 of 3156 NO M911 route. Must be set to NO to enable CCB. NO ISDN route. Must be set to NO to enable CCB. IAO ICT OGT Incoming and outgoing, incoming, or outgoing. Must be either IAO or ICT to enable CCB. Must be either IAO or OGT to get the CCBA prompt for outgoing calls. (NO) YES Change to controls or to timers. CCB (NO) YES Collect Call Blocking enabled or disabled on incoming route. CCB package 290 is required. Enter YES to obtain CCB timer prompts.
PAGE 184
Page 1158 of 3156 Collect Call Blocking LD 14 – Setup the firmware timing for XFCOT and EXUT cards. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add. Change. TYPE DID COT FEX WAT Trunk Type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. Terminal Number for the Option 11C. XTRK EXUT XCOT Type of card. FWTM (NO) YES Firmware timing for flash. Enter YES to enable firmware timing. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. RTMB 0-511 0-510 0-127 0-510 Trunk route and member number. For Option 11C.
PAGE 185
Collect Call Blocking Page 1159 of 3156 LD 10 – Enable Collect Call Blocking for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add. Change. TYPE: 500 Telephone type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. Terminal Number for the Option 11C. (CCBD) CCBA (Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking. ... CLS LD 11 – Enable Collect Call Blocking for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add. Change.
PAGE 186
Page 1160 of 3156 Collect Call Blocking LD 23 – Enable Collect Call Blocking on ACD queues. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add. Change. TYPE ACD ACD data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. ACDN xxxx ACD Directory Number. (NO) YES (Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking. ... CCBA LD 24 – Enable Collect Call Blocking on DISA blocks. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add. Change. TYPE DIS DISA data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number.
PAGE 187
Collect Call Blocking Page 1161 of 3156 LD 87 – Enable Collect Call Blocking on CDP Steering codes. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add. Change. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. FEAT CDP Coordinated Dialing Plan. TYPE TSC DSC Steering code type. (NO) YES (Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking. ... CCBA Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 188
Page 1162 of 3156 553-3001-306 Collect Call Blocking Standard 10.
PAGE 189
Page 1163 of 3156 Conference Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 190
Page 1164 of 3156 Conference Meridian 1 proprietary telephones require a separate Conference 3 or Conference 6 key/lamp pair. M2317 and M3000 Touchphones establish conference calls by means of a softkey. Analog (500/2500 type) telephones use the switchhook to establish a three-party conference.
PAGE 191
Conference Page 1165 of 3156 The number of timeslots is limited to 30 per conference loop. For Option 11C, a maximum of five simultaneous conferences, each consisting of six conference users, is supported per conference loop. Double conferences are blocked to avoid conference chains (that is, set A and set B are on an established call. The user of set B presses the Conference key to call set C. Any attempt by set C to initiate another conference is blocked if set B has not yet completed the conference).
PAGE 192
Page 1166 of 3156 Conference If an established call is extended over a trunk to initiate a conference call, this conference call cannot be set up if this trunk has answer supervision and the called extension has not answered. The AC15 Timed Reminder Recall feature cannot be activated by using the conference feature to extend a call over an AC15 TIE trunk, because the AC15 TIE trunk must have answer supervision and the called extension must be ringing.
PAGE 193
Conference Page 1167 of 3156 Attendant Console Three-party Conference (C6D) allows analog (500/2500 type) telephones on established calls to flash the switchhook and Dial 0 to talk to the attendant. Six-party conference users follow the same sequence, but the conference loop is seized and the call is treated as a conference call. When only two parties remain from the conference, the call is returned to a simple call if neither of the remaining parties is an Attendant Console.
PAGE 194
Page 1168 of 3156 Conference Call Page Network Wide A station set or Attendant Console that conferences an external Call Page Network Wide (PAGENET) uncontrolled call is not blocked. However, an external PAGENET controlled call is blocked. Call Park A parked call can be accessed after Conference is activated Call Party Name Display When pressed during an active call, or to set up a conference, the Conference, Connect, or Join Parties key clears the display.
PAGE 195
Conference Page 1169 of 3156 Called Party Disconnect Control Trunks with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed are treated as trunks without disconnect supervision when conferenced. Calling Party Name Display Denied Call Party Name Display, and thus the Calling Party Name Display Denied enhancement, do not apply to conference calls.
PAGE 196
Page 1170 of 3156 Conference China – Supervised Analog Lines If a terminal device answers an incoming call and then initiates a conference, no battery reversal answer supervision signal is extended to the terminal device when new parties of the conference answer. However, a hook flash disconnect supervision signal is extended to the terminal device when the last party in the conference disconnects.
PAGE 197
Conference Page 1171 of 3156 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced If Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) is activated at a telephone on a conference call, established Public Exchange/Central Office or toll calls are not affected. The CCOS restriction level is applied immediately; however, no new calls can be initiated from the conference. That telephone remains in the CCOS state after the end of the conference. Dial Access to Group Calls The Conference feature cannot be applied to a Group Call.
PAGE 198
Page 1172 of 3156 Conference Hot Line A Flexible Hot Line (non-enhanced) telephone cannot place conference calls, but an Enhanced Hot Line telephone can activate the conference feature. If the Hot Line restriction option is set, the conference call can terminate only to other Hot Line telephones. If the restriction option is not set, the conference call can terminate to any type of telephone. ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion A Call Completion request cannot be made on a conference call attempt.
PAGE 199
Conference Page 1173 of 3156 Meridian Mail Conference Control Three- and six-party conference allows 2500 telephones to disconnect from Meridian Mail by dial access during a conference call. A 2500 telephone on an established call flashes the switchhook to place the existing call on Consultation Hold. After receiving special dial tone, the user dials the third party. If the third party does not answer, the call is forwarded to Meridian Mail.
PAGE 200
Page 1174 of 3156 Conference Multi-Party Operations -Three-Party Service Multi-Party Operations Enhancements The patience tone or the Misoperation ringback is not applied to a conference party. Music With basic Music on Hold, when a call is placed on consultation hold while a Conference is being established, music does not play. Enhanced Music (EMUS) package 119 is required for music on consultation hold (see “Music, Enhanced” on page 2297).
PAGE 201
Conference Page 1175 of 3156 On Hold on Loudspeaker It will not be possible to conference the loudspeaker call to another party. Override A conference call cannot be entered by using Override. Override, Enhanced Telephones involved in conference calls cannot be force camped on or Priority Overridden. Overflow (fast busy) tone is returned to telephones attempting either Forced Camp-On or Priority Override. Paging Paging trunks cannot be conferenced.
PAGE 202
Page 1176 of 3156 Conference Ring Again This feature cannot be activated during a conference call. Station Activity Records For a set with Class of Service Call Detail Monitoring Allowed (CDMA) involved in a call with a trunk, a Station Activity Record is produced only when that set conferences in the first party. Conferencing of all subsequent parties does not generate a “D” record. An additional “D” record is produced when the last conferee with Class of Service CDMA connected to the trunk goes on hook.
PAGE 203
Conference Page 1177 of 3156 Trunk to Trunk Connection Trunk to Trunk Connection allows external trunks to remain established in a call, provided that all external trunks involved have disconnect supervision. With respect to charging costs associated with a conference call, once the last set involved in the conference call disconnects, a search is made of all remaining trunks in the call to determine which call is established in the call for the longest period of time.
PAGE 204
Page 1178 of 3156 Conference LD 11 – Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. KEY xx AO3 AO6 Add a Conference 3 or Conference 6 key (must be key 23 for the M3000). xx = key number.
PAGE 205
Conference Page 1179 of 3156 To add a new party to an established call on an analog (500/2500 type) telephone, follow these steps: 1 Flash the switchhook. You hear three beeps followed by dial tone. The first party is on hold. 2 Dial the telephone number of the person to be included in your call. When the call is answered, you may talk privately with the new party. 3 Flash the switchhook to include all parties in the call.
PAGE 206
Page 1180 of 3156 553-3001-306 Conference Standard 10.
PAGE 207
Page 1181 of 3156 Conference Warning Tone Enhancement Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182 Feature Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 208
Page 1182 of 3156 Conference Warning Tone Enhancement The Conference Warning Tone can be enabled or disabled via the CWFT prompt in overlay program. When the tone is enabled, a permanent speech path connection is placed from the tone circuit to the conference circuit to provide the tone to all parties connected in a conference.
PAGE 209
Conference Warning Tone Enhancement Page 1183 of 3156 LD 56 – Configure Conference Warning Tone. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Modify existing data. TYPE FTC Flexible Tones and Cadences data block. TABL 0 FTC table number 0. Only table number 0 can be used to make changes to the Conference Warning Tone. RING NO Modify the ringing feature definitions. HCCT YES Modification of the hardware controlled cadence tone definitions allowed. NO End-to-end Signaling type. ... ...
PAGE 210
Page 1184 of 3156 Conference Warning Tone Enhancement LD 97 – Enable Conference Warning Tone. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Modify existing data. TYPE XCTP Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters. (0) 1 Conference pad values. Use software pad values. Use pad values defined by switch settings. CPAD DTMF 0-(14)-255 Tone table of the first Dual-tone Multifrequency digit to be used. CFWT (NO) YES (Disable) enable Conference Warning Tone.
PAGE 211
Page 1185 of 3156 Console Operations Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185 Console Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185 Queue Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 212
Page 1186 of 3156 Console Operations Those consoles are configured (Overlay 15 option PSA/PSD) to have presentation status for the ICI key to handle the following call treatments: • If a call is not automatically presented to an idle console, it is indicated on the appropriate ICI key on all consoles within the customer or ACG (Overlay 15 option MTI/CUI).
PAGE 213
Console Operations Page 1187 of 3156 Feature interactions Console Presentation Departmental Listing Directory Number Departmental Listing Directory Number is a way of directing attendant calls. The feature has some similarities to MTS, but it overrides Multi-tenant Service (MTS) and is therefore not affected by Console Presentation. Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide Console Operation makes it possible for each console to select which ICI call types will be presented to the console.
PAGE 214
Page 1188 of 3156 Console Operations ... - OPT (PSD) PSA Presentation Status selection allowed (denied) on Attendant Consoles. (CUI) MTI ICI lamps show Multi-tenant Service (MTS) Attendant Console Group (AGP) information for incoming calls. (RECO) RECA Attendant calls will be redirected when there is no presentation status to other consoles in the console group; RECO when all consoles are busy, RECA when all but one console is busy.
PAGE 215
Page 1189 of 3156 Console Presentation Group Level Services Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 216
Page 1190 of 3156 Console Presentation Group Level Services • Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) Each CPG allows four LDNs. • Night Service (NSVC) Each CPG can go into Night Service mode independent of the other groups. • Recorded Announcement (RAN) Each CPG can have its own recorded overflow announcements. Operating parameters Console Presentation Group (CPG) services and Departmental Listed Directory Numbers (DLDN) are mutually exclusive at the customer level.
PAGE 217
Console Presentation Group Level Services Page 1191 of 3156 If the attendant goes into Night Service while a call is parked, the recall is presented to the Night DN defined for that CPG. If an attendant goes into Night Service while the recall is in the attendant queue, it stays in the attendant queue until the call is abandoned.
PAGE 218
Page 1192 of 3156 Console Presentation Group Level Services 4 LD 93 – Assign a route to an attendant group number. 5 LD 93 – Add Console Presentation Group features. LD 93 – Enable Console Presentation Group (CPG). Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE TENS Multi-Tenant data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. CPGS YES Enable CPG Level Services. LD 93 – Assign Attendant Consoles to a presentation group. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change.
PAGE 219
Console Presentation Group Level Services Page 1193 of 3156 LD 93 – Assign tenants to an attendant group number. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE TCPG Tenant to Console Presentation Group data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. TEN 1-511 Tenant number. AGNO 0-63 Attendant Console group number. LD 93 – Assign a route to an attendant group number. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change.
PAGE 220
Page 1194 of 3156 Console Presentation Group Level Services LDN0 xxxx Listed DN 0. NIT1 xxxx First Night Service by Time of Day (NTOD) DN. TIM1 hhmm Hour minute for First NTOD DN. NIT2 xxxx Second NTOD DN. TIM2 hhmm Time for Second NTOD. NIT3 xxxx Third NTOD DN. TIM3 hhmm Time for Third NTOD DN. NIT4 xxxx Fourth NTOD DN. TIM4 hhmm Time for Fourth NTOD. ICI xx aaa Incoming Call Indicators (ICI). AQTT 1-(30)-255 Attendant queuing threshold. AODN xxxx Attendant overflow DN.
PAGE 221
Page 1195 of 3156 Controlled Class of Service Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 222
Page 1196 of 3156 Controlled Class of Service CCOS controlling telephones must refer to the Prime Directory Number (PDN) when activating or canceling CCOS on other telephones. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents cannot be restricted by CCOS. Feature interactions Authorization Code The Authorization Code overrides a telephone’s CCOS restriction level. Conference If CCOS is activated at a telephone involved in a conference call, established Central Office or toll calls are not affected.
PAGE 223
Controlled Class of Service Page 1197 of 3156 Hot Line When a Hot Line DN is on a telephone that has Controlled Class of Service activated, Hot Line calls ignore the imposed Class of Service if the System Speed Call (SSC) package is present and the Hot Line list is given an adequate Network Class of Service (NCOS) for the override Multiple Appearance Directory Number CCOS restriction levels are activated or canceled on controlled telephones through their Prime Directory Number (PDN).
PAGE 224
Page 1198 of 3156 Controlled Class of Service Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 15 – Enable CCOS for a customer. 2 LD 11 – Allow CCOS on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. 3 LD 10 – Allow CCOS on analog (500/2500 type) telephones. 4 LD 11 – Change CCOS controlling telephone assignments on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. LD 15 – Enable CCOS for a customer. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change.
PAGE 225
Controlled Class of Service Page 1199 of 3156 LD 11 – Allow CCOS on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. CLS (CCSD), CCSA (Deny) allow CCOS. LD 10 – Allow CCOS on analog (500/2500 type) telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
PAGE 226
Page 1200 of 3156 Controlled Class of Service Feature operation To activate CCOS, follow these steps: 1 Press CCOS. Note that this is a toggle: If CCOS is already active, pressing the key will change the CCOS state to inactive. Check the CCOS lamp to determine if CCOS is already active. 2 Dial the Prime Directory Number (PDN) of the telephone to be changed and press CCOS. 3 Press Rls. To deactivate CCOS, follow these steps: 553-3001-306 1 Press CCOS.
PAGE 227
Page 1069 of 3156 CIS ANI Reception Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic ANI request . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solicited ANI request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANI Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANI Digits Display . .. . . . . . . . .
PAGE 228
Page 1070 of 3156 CIS ANI Reception The ANI digits received from the CIS CO are used by the Meridian 1 as the R2MFC Calling Number Identification (CNI) digits. A list of uses for the ANI digits is found on page 1071. The ANI digits are also displayed on the display of the Meridian 1 proprietary set or on the attendant console display. ANI Reception is performed in one of two ways: • ANI request is issued automatically by the incoming local CIS DTI2 trunk during the call setup.
PAGE 229
CIS ANI Reception Page 1071 of 3156 • They are mapped into the Multi-frequency Compelled Signaling complying with CCITT R2 specification (R2MFC) Calling Number Identification R2MFC (CNI) • They are displayed on the display of the Meridian 1 proprietary sets and on the attendant consoles • They are stored in the Call Detail Recorder • They are sent through the Meridian Link and the ICCM link using the fields dedicated for the R2MFC CNI digits The translation of the dialed number which is received fr
PAGE 230
Page 1072 of 3156 CIS ANI Reception Figure 19 Automatic ANI request for incoming local call (decadic dial pulse mode) Meridian 1 Software CDTI2 card SEIZE CO SEIZE SEIZE ACK SEIZE ACK Collect predefined number of the DP digits and then send ANI request to the CIS CO. The DN translation is postponed until the ANI is received or the partial dial (EOD) timer expires.
PAGE 231
CIS ANI Reception Page 1073 of 3156 Figure 20 Automatic ANI request for the MF shuttle call Meridian 1 Software CDTI2 card SEIZE CO SEIZE SEIZE ACK SEIZE ACK First MF digit request When the last MF digit is received the call is not provided to the destination until the ANI is received or the ATO timer expires. MFS messages The MFS protocol handling is performed. Send B4 signal Send ANI request to the CIS CO when the MFS protocol handling is ended.
PAGE 232
Page 1074 of 3156 CIS ANI Reception Figure 21 Manually solicited ANI request Meridian 1 Software CDTI2 card ANSWER The call is answered by the Meridian 1 user. Display key is pressed on the terminator set with display. ANI request message is sent and the ANI request timers are downloaded to the card. ANI request + ANI duration timer 500Hz duration CO ANSWER Send Seize ACKto the CO and start 100 ms ANI request start timer.
PAGE 233
CIS ANI Reception Page 1075 of 3156 ANI Gateways The ANI digits which are received from the CIS CO party as a response to the automatic ANI request are propagated to the Meridian 1 terminating party if it is capable of receiving the CNI digits.
PAGE 234
Page 1076 of 3156 CIS ANI Reception The CAC digit is separated from the ANI number by the minus sign. When displaying ANI, there are several options available for CAC display. If ANI request is repeated several times during a single call, each time new ANI digits overwrite old ANI digits on the display. If the DN key that requested the ANI information is placed on hold when the ANI digits arrive from the CDTI2 card, the ANI digits are not displayed.
PAGE 235
CIS ANI Reception Page 1077 of 3156 Operating parameters This feature requires the CIS DTI2 card NTCG01 vintage AC for Options 51C - 81C, the CIS DTI2 card NTCG02 vintage AC is used for Option 11C. Feature interactions CIS Digital Trunk Interface and CIS Multifrequency Shuttle (MFS) The feature is based on the CIS DTI2 interface features. The feature enhances the capabilities of CIS DTI2 but does not change previous functionality.
PAGE 236
Page 1078 of 3156 CIS ANI Reception Feature implementation This section contains the overlay procedures required to configure the ANI Reception feature. Note: If Malicous Call Trace is used, turn to the Software Features Guide for detailed MCT implementation instructions. • LD 73 - The response MFA - Multifrequency Advanced has been added to the CISFW prompt to support the ANI Reception and the Firmware Dial Tone Detection features on the NTCK01AC and NTCK02AC cards.
PAGE 237
CIS ANI Reception Page 1079 of 3156 Note: The Alternative ANI is composed from the access code of the incoming CIS DTI2 DID route and the number of the incoming trunk within the route. • The ANI TimeOut (ATO) timer which was used only for Outgoing CIS trunks is now also used for incoming CIS trunks to define timeout for the automatic ANI digits reception.
PAGE 238
Page 1080 of 3156 CIS ANI Reception Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 73 - Define Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as firmware type definition. 2 LD 14 - Add Calling Number Identification Allowed (CNA) as a class of service for incoming Direct Inward Dial (DID) CIS DTI2 trunks. 3 LD 16 - Define the CIS Route. LD 73 - Define Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as firmware type definition. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change existing data.
PAGE 239
CIS ANI Reception Page 1081 of 3156 LD 14 - Add Calling Number Identification Allowed (CNA) as a class of service for incoming Direct Inward Dial (DID) CIS DTI2 trunks. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE DID Direct Inward Dial trunks. ... ... ... CLS Class of Service. CNA Allow Calling Number Identification for incoming CIS DTI2 DID trunks. LD 16 - Define the CIS Route. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data.
PAGE 240
Page 1082 of 3156 TIMR CIS ANI Reception ATO 2048-(2560)-5120 ANI Timeout timer. Defines how long Meridian 1 waits for the ANI information from the CIS CO. If timer expires before the ANI is uploaded from the CDTI2 card, Meridian 1 treats the call as it is defined in the ANI Failure Treatment option. The ATO should be at least twice as large as the ARD. CISR YES - CACD The option defines how the CAC is displayed on the display of the set or console.
PAGE 241
CIS ANI Reception Page 1083 of 3156 Feature operation Manual ANI request is made by pressing a calling number display key on the Attendant Console or on the Meridian 1 proprietary set followed by pressing the SCR key or by pressing the TRC key on the Meridian 1 proprietary set or Attendant Console.
PAGE 242
Page 1084 of 3156 553-3001-306 CIS ANI Reception Standard 10.
PAGE 243
Page 1201 of 3156 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 244
Page 1202 of 3156 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced On M3000 telephones, the CCOS key can be assigned as a programmable key (0-5 only). This feature is applicable only when the CLS lamp is lit on the controlling telephone. The CLS key on an Attendant Console can be used only on an idle loop. (The loop lamp is lit; source and destination lamps are dark.
PAGE 245
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced Page 1203 of 3156 Pretranslation The DN used to program the CCOS should be the actual DN before pretranslation. When programming CCOS, the DN entered is not pretranslated. Feature packaging Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) package 173 requires: • Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) package 81.
PAGE 246
Page 1204 of 3156 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced - CCRS CCOS restrictions. (UNR) CTD CUN FRE FR1 FR2 SRE TLD Unrestricted service. Conditionally Toll Denied. Conditionally Unrestricted. Fully Restricted. Fully Restricted level 1. Fully Restricted level 2. Semi-Restricted. Toll Denied. - ECC1 xxx Enhanced Controlled Class of Service, Level 1. xxx = (UNR), CTD, CUN, FRE, FR1, FR2, SRE, TLD. - ECC2 xxx Enhanced Controlled Class of Service, Level 2.
PAGE 247
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. CLS (CCSD) CCSA (Deny) allow CCOS. Page 1205 of 3156 LD 11 – Configure the controlled Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. CLS (CCSD) CCSA (Deny) allow CCOS. LD 12 – Assign ECCS keys for Attendant Console.
PAGE 248
Page 1206 of 3156 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced Feature operation To activate Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone with the feature currently inactive, follow these steps: 1 Press CCOS to begin the activation sequence. Note that this is a toggle: if CCOS is already active, pressing the key will change the CCOS state to inactive. Check the CCOS lamp to determine if CCOS is already active. 2 Dial the PDN of the telephone to be changed and press CCOS.
PAGE 249
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced 4 Page 1207 of 3156 To select ECC1, dial # 1. Note that the octothorpe (#) is required. The console’s display shows the DN of the changed telephone and a 1. To select ECC2, dial # 2. Note that the octothorpe (#) is required. The console’s display shows the DN of the changed telephone and a 2. 5 Press Rls. To deactivate Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS), follow these steps: 1 Select an idle loop key. 2 Press CCOS.
PAGE 250
Page 1208 of 3156 553-3001-306 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced Standard 10.
PAGE 251
Page 1209 of 3156 CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Call Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Tone . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 252
Page 1210 of 3156 CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control The CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control feature introduces the concept of Associated trunks (AST). Previously, only Associated sets existed. An Associated trunk is configured by setting the AST prompt to YES in the Trunk Data Block. When AST = YES, the trunk can be monitored and controlled from a host CTI application via the AML interface. AST includes both Associated sets and Associated trunks.
PAGE 253
CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control Page 1211 of 3156 • The trunk must be an Associated trunk (AST = YES in Overlay 14). • The call must be a 2-party call, and the call state must be established. Warning Tone With the Warning Tone functionality, the Connection Request (CON) message is enhanced so that a short tone is provided to the originating party of a call. The Warning Tone functionality is not limited to trunk calls.
PAGE 254
Page 1212 of 3156 CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control Incremental Software Management (ISM) With the CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control feature, the AST ISM limit now includes the count of both Associated sets and trunks. This limits the total number of AST sets and trunks allowed on one system. When this limit is reached, no more associated sets and trunks can be configured, and an error message is displayed.
PAGE 255
CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control • DASS • DPNSS • EuroISDN ETSI • Numeris • Swissnet • 1TR6 • MCDN • UK Analog Page 1213 of 3156 The design and operation of the above trunk signaling protocols are not modified by the CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control feature. Ground Start Analog and ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) trunks are not supported for CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control. The CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control functionalities are supported on the LAPB AML interface only.
PAGE 256
Page 1214 of 3156 CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control With Trunk Monitoring, when the AML interface is down, USM messages are not sent. No error messages, other than general maintenance messages, are generated for this condition. The Trunk Monitoring feature mainly monitors the events of far-end answer and far-end disconnect. It is not intended to be used for monitoring the trunk state transition from idle to active or vice versa. Trunk status USM messages are sent only when trunk status is detected.
PAGE 257
CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control Page 1215 of 3156 Customer Controlled Routing The modified AML messages are not supported by Customer Controlled Routing (CCR). With the Trunk Disconnect functionality, it is possible to disconnect a trunk call to a CCR Control DN. This operates in the same manner as a disconnect initiated on behalf of an Associated set currently supported by Meridian Link. Meridian 911 The modified AML messages are not supported by Meridian 911 (M911).
PAGE 258
Page 1216 of 3156 CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control • Automatic Call Distribution Package C (ACDC) package 42 • Automatic Call Distribution Load Management Reports (LMAN) package 43 • Automatic Call Distribution Package D (ACDD) package 50 • Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) package 98 • Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) package 145 • 1.
PAGE 259
CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control Page 1217 of 3156 LD 14 – Configure the Associated Trunk and Event Group. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE aaaa Trunk type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. AST YES Associated trunk for CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control. NO = Not an Associated trunk for CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control (default). IAPG (0)-15 Event Group for USM messages. TGAR (0)-31 Trunk Group Access Restriction. ...
PAGE 260
Page 1218 of 3156 553-3001-306 CTI Trunk Monitoring and Control Standard 10.
PAGE 261
1220 Page 1219 of 3156 D-channel Expansion The D-channel Expansion feature increases the total number of possible D-channels in a multiple group Meridian 1 system. The D-channel Expansion feature increases the number of physical I/O addresses permitted for Dchannel application to 16 for each network group. For each MSDL physical I/O address, up to four ports are available for D-channel use. With the DChannel Expansion feature, the X11 software supports up to 255 D-channels.
PAGE 262
Page 1220 of 3156 553-3001-306 D-channel Expansion Standard 10.
PAGE 263
Page 1221 of 3156 Departmental Listed Directory Number Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 264
Page 1222 of 3156 Departmental Listed Directory Number — a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk whose DID number is the same as the LDN • Calls that originate from internal telephones or TIE trunks when: — a telephone user dials the LDN — a telephone user associated with a departmental Attendant Console dials 0, or — a TIE-line user dials the LDN. The DLDN feature associates Attendant Consoles with an LDN. Up to 63 Attendant Consoles can be associated with one LDN.
PAGE 265
Departmental Listed Directory Number Page 1223 of 3156 When an attendant presses the Release key, the Meridian 1 checks to see if there are any calls waiting in the queue. If there are calls waiting, it tests whether or not the Attendant Console, if it is next in the circular list, can answer the first call in the queue. If the call can be answered, it is presented to the Attendant Console. Otherwise it is put back into the queue and another call is sought.
PAGE 266
Page 1224 of 3156 Departmental Listed Directory Number Call Forward Busy Call Forward No Answer Call Forward Call Forward No Answer to the attendant and Call Forward Busy operate like Call Forward to 0, and are routed to any idle Attendant Console in the customer group. Centralized Attendant Service LDN calls are not screened for Centralized Attendant Service (CAS). When a CAS key is pressed at a CAS remote Attendant Console, LDN calls will be handled at the CAS main as if the DLDN feature did not exist.
PAGE 267
Departmental Listed Directory Number Page 1225 of 3156 Night Service DLDN does not affect Night Service (including TAFAS). Calls presented to the LDN from an external source will queue for the night bell. All other attendant calls receive busy treatment if the night Directory Number (DN) is busy. Feature packaging Departmental Listed Directory (DLDN) package 76 has no other package dependencies.
PAGE 268
Page 1226 of 3156 Departmental Listed Directory Number - LDN0 xxxx Listed Directory Number Zero. - LDA0 1 - 63 ALL Attendant Consoles associated with LDN 0. - LDN1 xxxx Listed Directory Number One. - LDA1 1 - 63 ALL Attendant Console number associated with LDN 1. - LDN2 xxxx Listed Directory Number Two. - LDA2 1 - 63 ALL Attendant Console number associated with LDN 2. - LDN3 xxxx Listed Directory Number Three. - LDA3 1 - 63 ALL Attendant Console number associated with LDN 3.
PAGE 269
Departmental Listed Directory Number Page 1227 of 3156 TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. LDN (NO) 0-3 Telephone associated with LDN (0-3 or none). Choose NO to remove this telephone from the group. LD 11 – Configure Departmental Listed Directory Number for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number.
PAGE 270
Page 1228 of 3156 553-3001-306 Departmental Listed Directory Number Standard 10.
PAGE 271
Page 1229 of 3156 Dial Access to Group Calls Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 272
Page 1230 of 3156 Dial Access to Group Calls For more information on group calls, see the “Group Call” on page 1587 description contained in this guide. Operating parameters All group stations must have Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) Class of Service. Because analog (500/2500 type) telephones have no lamp state, there is no indication to the call originator that all group members have answered.
PAGE 273
Dial Access to Group Calls Page 1231 of 3156 On Hold on Loudspeaker If a group call is initiated from a set with Dealer Allowed (Class of Service), the conference is built up on the assigned loop of the loudspeaker or speech monitor system channel since this is a potential On Hold on Loudspeaker call.
PAGE 274
Page 1232 of 3156 Dial Access to Group Calls LD 57 – Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Group Calls. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. GRPF xxxx Group Call code. - GRCL 0-63 Group Call List number. Feature operation To make a Group Call, • Press the Group Call key. All group members are automatically called. The LCD indicator beside the Group Call key flashes until all members have answered.
PAGE 275
Page 1233 of 3156 Dial Intercom Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233 Distinctive ringing for Dial Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234 Dial Intercom Handsfree Voice Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 276
Page 1234 of 3156 Dial Intercom Voice or ring may be specified on a DIG basis for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. If voice is specified, an idle station rings once for two seconds. The calling party is then connected and may make a voice announcement. If ring is implemented, normal ringing is received until the called party answers. This feature provides the option of an announcement or a two-way speech path. The ring option must be used if a 500 telephone is a member of the group.
PAGE 277
Dial Intercom Page 1235 of 3156 DI analog (500/2500 type) telephones cannot dial the attendant or be dialed by the attendant. A DI telephone cannot be assigned a member number that conflicts with the Special Prefix (SPRE) code. In the case of double-digit DIG values, the first digit cannot be the same as the SPRE code. For example, if the SPRE code is 7, the member number cannot be 7 or any number from 70 through 79. A two-digit SPRE code, such as 77, allows 99 DIG member numbers (00, 0176, and 78-99).
PAGE 278
Page 1236 of 3156 Dial Intercom Call Party Name Display The display on telephones connected by Dial Intercom shows the group member’s DIG number plus Call Party Name Display information. Call Pickup Call Pickup may be used by Meridian 1 proprietary telephones if the telephones are all in the same DIG and Call Pickup Group and the ring option is specified for the DIG. Call Pickup Network Wide The Dial Intercom feature is not supported network wide.
PAGE 279
Dial Intercom Page 1237 of 3156 Hot Line The analog (500/2500 type) Hot Line telephones cannot be members of Dial Intercom Groups (DIGs).
PAGE 280
Page 1238 of 3156 Dial Intercom 3 LD 11 – Configure Dial Intercom for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. 4 LD 15 – Configure Handsfree Voice Call for the Meridian 1 system. LD 15 – Enable Dial Intercom for a customer. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: FTR Gate opener. CUST 0-99 Customer number. - DGRP 0-2046 Maximum number of DIGs that can be defined for the customer. The maximum number of DIGs allowed is 2046.
PAGE 281
Dial Intercom Page 1239 of 3156 LD 11 – Configure Dial Intercom for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. KEY xx DIG aaa bb c Add a Dial Intercom key, where: xx = key number aaa = group number (0-2046) bb = member number (0-99), and c = r (ring) or v (voice).
PAGE 282
Page 1240 of 3156 Dial Intercom If your phone and the phone you are calling are configured for the voice option, you can deliver a voice message after two seconds of ringing. To answer a Dial Intercom call when you are on a line other than your DIG line: 1 Release the current call or place it on hold. 2 Press Intercom. Dial Intercom Handsfree Voice Call Examples of both Handsfree Voice Call options are listed below.
PAGE 283
Page 1241 of 3156 Dial Pulse/Dual-tone Multifrequency Conversion Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 284
Page 1242 of 3156 Dial Pulse/Dual-tone Multifrequency Conversion Operating parameters There are no operating parameters associated with this feature. Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software. Feature implementation There are no specific implementation procedures for this feature. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 285
Page 1243 of 3156 Dial Tone Detection Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 286
Page 1244 of 3156 Dial Tone Detection Operating parameters There are no operating parameters associated with this feature. Feature interactions Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) – Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) Dial tone detection is supported in the CIS, but with the limitation of low reliability of the tone provided by the Public Exchange.
PAGE 287
Dial Tone Detection Page 1245 of 3156 LD 13 – Create or modify data blocks for Digitone Receivers: Prompt Response Description DTD Dial Tone Detection. ... TYPE LD 16 – Create or modify data for trunk routes: Prompt Response Description (NO) YES Dial Tone Detection is (is not) to be performed on this route. ... DTD LD 17 – Modify the system hardware and software parameters: Prompt Response Description NO No Dial Tone Detection tests are required. ...
PAGE 288
Page 1246 of 3156 553-3001-306 Dial Tone Detection Standard 10.
PAGE 289
Page 1247 of 3156 Dialed Number Identification Service The Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) shows the last three or four digits of the dialed DN received from auto-terminated Direct Inward Dialing (DID) and TIE trunks on the display for ACD agents. The maximum number of characters allowed is 27, including spaces. In telemarketing environments, DNIS can reduce the time needed to serve a call.
PAGE 290
Page 1248 of 3156 553-3001-306 Dialed Number Identification Service Standard 10.
PAGE 291
Page 1249 of 3156 Digit Display Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249 Attendant Console Digit Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249 Meridian 1 proprietary telephone Digit Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 292
Page 1250 of 3156 Digit Display • Incoming calls On incoming calls and forwarded Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls, the trunk access code and member number are displayed. For all station dial-0 calls, the calling station DN is displayed. For recalls, the destination DN is displayed. • Display Source/Display Destination keys Two keys are provided to allow the attendant to display the source and destination numbers for any connection completed through the console.
PAGE 293
Digit Display Page 1251 of 3156 Time and Date are displayed with an additional Time and Date (TAD) key. CAUTION This option should not be used when a Prime DN appears on another telephone as a Prime DN. Severe real-time penalties will occur (ERR040 message). The following display options are available: • No Digit Display (NDD) This is the default option. • Automatic Digit Display (ADD) This option allows the display of digit information during call processing.
PAGE 294
Page 1252 of 3156 Digit Display Press the Display (DSP) key, then the feature key to display information associated with these features: 553-3001-306 • ACD in-calls If the Display Key is used to view information defined on the ACD DN key of an agent serving multiple queues, then the ACD DN displayed will be the current queue being served if the agent is active on a call. The last queue is served if the agent is not serving an ACD call or the Primary ACD DN if the agent is logged out.
PAGE 295
Digit Display Page 1253 of 3156 • Call Waiting party Pressing the Call Waiting key to answer a waiting call makes that call active. The call can be placed on hold by pressing the Call Waiting key again, or by pressing any idle DN key on the set. If the Display key is pressed before the Call Waiting key, the call waiting party information is displayed. • Conference While in a conference call, the Display (DSP) key can be used to obtain information on other keys.
PAGE 296
Page 1254 of 3156 Digit Display Operating parameters Digit Display must be enabled for all console types in LD 15, using the prompt OPT. Only telephones equipped with a Digit Display module can use this feature. The Display Time and Display Date key cannot be assigned to key 0.
PAGE 297
Digit Display Page 1255 of 3156 Centralized Multiple Line Emulation The digit display of the station picking up a parked call recall shows the parked call’s access code followed by the parked call’s access-identification code. If the picked-up call is a group member call, the display shows the group number of the picked-up station. Dial Intercom The digit display will be cleared when the Dial Intercom Group (DIG) key is pressed. When the user dials the DI code, the digits of the code are displayed.
PAGE 298
Page 1256 of 3156 Digit Display LOGIVOX Telephone During manual dialing or last number redial, the display shows the dialed digits, even if the set has display denied Class of Service. If the set has LOGIVOX denied Class of Service, each digit is shown twice. Override Override, Enhanced Override, Priority The Digit Display of the telephone being overridden changes to the Directory Number (DN) of the overriding telephone once Priority Override is accomplished.
PAGE 299
Digit Display Page 1257 of 3156 CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. - OPT (XDP) IDP (Exclude) include Digit Display capability for Attendant Consoles of this customer. LD 11 – Configure Digit Display for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C.
PAGE 300
Page 1258 of 3156 DLEN Digit Display (8) 16 Digit Display entry length (the default is 8). This prompt applies to QCW consoles only. KEY xx DCW xx DDT xx DPD xx DPS xx DTM xx MDT xx MTM Add Add Add Add Add Add Add display Call Waiting key. display Date key. display Destination key. display Source key. display Time key. display/change Date key. display/change Time key. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 301
Page 1259 of 3156 Digital Private Network Signaling System British Telecom’s Digital Private Signaling System No. 1 (DPNSS1) is the open signaling protocol standard for intelligent private network digital connections. DPNSS1 provides the signaling capability to establish simple telephony and data calls, as well as supplementary features.
PAGE 302
Page 1260 of 3156 Digital Private Network Signaling System For more information on DPNSS1, see DPNSS1: Product Overview Guide (553-3921-100). 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 303
Page 1261 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 304
Page 1262 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States To satisfy the unique requirements of CIS DTI signaling, two new trunk cards have been introduced: a dual 2 Mbps Enhanced Network (ENET) styled digital trunk card (CDTI2); and a 2 Mbps digital trunk card (CSDTI2) for use with Option 11C systems. The CDTI2 card provides 60 voice or data 64 kbps channels, whereas the CSDTI2 card provides 30 voice or data 64 kbps channels.
PAGE 305
Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States Page 1263 of 3156 Operating parameters CDTI2 and CSDTI2 cards do not support Periodic Pulse Metering, continuous pulse detection, or echo suppression. The only line signaling supported for CIS is a two-bit ABCD protocol. The data in ANI always refers to the originator of the outgoing call. If the call is transferred, the ANI information is not changed and therefore may be different than that of the set currently involved in the call.
PAGE 306
Page 1264 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States Called Party Disconnect Control This feature may not be used in the CIS market because of its signaling requirements. Computer to PBX Interface Computer to PBX Interface (CPI) is not supported on CDTI2/CSDTI2 because the protocol conversion is not supported. Call Detail Recording If ANI is requested to be output in the Call Detail Recording (CDR) record, it will not refer to the CIS DTI2 ANI.
PAGE 307
Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States Page 1265 of 3156 Periodic Pulse Metering Periodic Pulse Metering is not supported. Pulsed E&M DTI2 Signaling Pulsed E&M is not supported. R2MFC Calling Number Identification The category (CAC) used to build the R2MFC Calling Number Identification (CNI) for the analog, digital, and Basic Rate Interface (BRI) sets is also used to build the CIS Automatic Number Identification (ANI).
PAGE 308
Page 1266 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States The following packages are required: • Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125 • 2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129 • International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 • Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160 • Meridian 1 Extended Peripheral Equipment (XPE) package 203 • Meridian 1 Extended Conference, TDS and MFS (XCT0) package 204, and • Meridian 1 Superloop Administration (XCT1) pac
PAGE 309
Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States Page 1267 of 3156 15 LD 56 – Configure Tone to Last Party. 16 LD 18 – Add or change Speed Call lists, System Speed Call lists, Group Call lists, Enhanced Hot Line lists, Pretranslation lists, and Special Service lists. Special Service lists can now handle the Special Service Unanswered Call (SSUC) call type. LD 17 – Change system configuration data. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE CFN PARM Configuration Record.
PAGE 310
Page 1268 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States LD 73 – Define DTI2 data. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE DTI2 DTI2 Data Block. FEAT LPTI Loop timers and some other per DTI2 loop defined parameters. LOOP DTI2 loop number. CDTI2 YES CDTI2/CSDTI2 card. P DIGIT (S) PXXX DP outpulsing will be sent on signaling bit A. P METR (R) NO Pulse Metering.
PAGE 311
Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States Page 1269 of 3156 LD 73 – Define the SICA table for CDTI2/CSDTI2. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE DTI2 DTI2 Data Block. FEAT ABCD Signaling category. SICA 2-16 SICA table number. 0101, 1101 Idle on backward sent, where: ... Incoming/ Outgoing Calls IDLE(S) 0101 = incoming trunks (local and toll), and 1101 = outgoing trunks.
PAGE 312
Page 1270 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States P EOSF(S) NO Pulsed End of Selection Free is not used. EOSF(S) NO 1001 Steady End of Selection Free, where: NO = local trunk, and 1001 = incoming toll trunk. P EOSB(S) NO Pulsed End of Selection Busy is not used. EOSB (S) 0001 Steady End of Selection Busy. P OPCA(R) NO Operator calling. E_CONN(S) 1001 1101 Connect Send (Answer), where: 1001 = local trunk, and 1101 = incoming toll trunk.
PAGE 313
Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States Page 1271 of 3156 E_SEZ(S) 1001 Seize. SEZD(S) NO Seize for data calls. SEZA(R) 1101 Seize Acknowledge. P WNKS(R) NO Wink start. P EOS(R) NO End of selection busy. E_CONN(S) NO Connect. E_CONN(R) 1001 Connect Receive (Answer). P OPRC(R) NO Operator recall for special services. P BURS(S) NO Bring up receiver for L1 networking. P BURS(R) NO Bring up receiver for L1 networking. CLRB(R) 0001 Clear Back (B Ring Off).
PAGE 314
Page 1272 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States LD 97 – Define dial pulse make-break ratio. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE SYSP System parameters. INTN YES A-law should be used as system companding law. P10R (50)-70 Make-break ratio for primary 10 pulses per second dial pulse dialing. P12R (50)-70 Make-break ratio for secondary 10 pulses per second dial pulse dialing. P20R (50)-70 Make-break ratio for 20 pulses per second dialing. ...
PAGE 315
Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States TKTP Page 1273 of 3156 DID COT Trunk type, where: DID = incoming trunks route, and COT = outgoing trunks route. DTRK YES Digital trunk. DGTP DTI2 Digital trunk type for route. ICT OGT Incoming trunk. Outgoing trunk. CNTL YES Changes to controls or timers. TIMR DDL 0 Delay Dial Timer not needed. TIMR DSI 49992 Disconnect supervision timer (five-second value, rounded to the nearest 128 ms.).
PAGE 316
Page 1274 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States NEDC ORG ETH Near end disconnect control, where: ORG = originating end disconnect control for incoming calls, and ETH = either end control for outgoing calls. FEDC ORG ETH Far end disconnect control, where: ORG = originating end disconnect control for incoming calls, and ETH = either end control for outgoing calls. CDPC NO Meridian 1 is not the only controlling party on incoming calls.
PAGE 317
Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States TDG Page 1275 of 3156 8 Toll digit (list of digits after the trunk access code which indicate toll calls). This can also be defined in LD 18. PRDL YES Partial dial timing is equipped using EOD. DNSZ (0)-7 Number of digits expected on DID routes. 0 (the default) indicates no fixed value. This value must be defined according to the numbering plan. 30 Duration of busy/overflow tone to be returned on DID route in seconds.
PAGE 318
Page 1276 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States LD 16 – Add or change route data for an incoming, non CIS DTI2, trunk. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG New or change. TYPE RDB Route Data Block. ICT IAO Incoming trunk. Incoming and outgoing trunk. CAC 0-(3)-9 Route ANI category. ANDN 0-9999999 Route ANI DN. RDNL 0-(4)-7 Remote DN Length. ... ICOG ... Note: This trunk may be any kind of trunk.
PAGE 319
Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States Page 1277 of 3156 LD 14 – Add or change trunk data for CIS DTI2 incoming and outgoing trunk. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG New or change. TYPE DID COT Direct Inward Dialing (for incoming trunks), or Central Office Trunk (for outgoing trunks). 2-16 Signaling category table number. ... SICA Note: standard default SICA table (number 1) may not be used for CIS DTI2 trunks.
PAGE 320
Page 1278 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States LD 10 – Specify ANI category for CIS DTI2 calls. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add or change. TYPE: 500 500/2500 telephone data block. CAC 0-(3)-9 Specify ANI category for CIS DTI2 calls. CLS (DNAA) DNAD DN of set (allowed) not allowed for use in ANI messages. ... LD 11 – Specify ANI category for CIS DTI2 calls. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add or change.
PAGE 321
Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States Page 1279 of 3156 LD 27 – Add or change Digital Subscriber Loop (BRI set) for CIS. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add or change. TYPE DSL Digital Subscriber Loop. CAC 0-(3)-9 Specify ANI category for CIS DTI2 calls. CLS (DNAA) DNAD DN of set (allowed) not allowed for use in ANI messages. ... LD 88 – Add or change the Authcode data block. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG New or change.
PAGE 322
Page 1280 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States LD 56 – Configure the dial tone. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG New or change. TYPE DTAD Special dial tone after dialed number. DDGT 9 Use “9” as the outgoing local access code. TONE SRC1 Dial tone to be provided after the dialed digit 9 (Source Tone 1). REQ NEW CHG New or change. TYPE FTC Flexible Tones and Cadences data block. TABL 0-31 FTC table number. DFLT 0-31 Default FTC table.
PAGE 323
Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States Page 1281 of 3156 LD 56 – Configure Tone to Last Party. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG New or change. TYPE FTC Flexible Tones and Cadences data block. TABL 0-31 FTC table number. DFLT 0-31 Default FTC table. RING HCCT YES Change the TDS card controlled cadence tones. ... TLP TDSH Tone to Last Party. 0 0 31 3 Cadence 31 in MCAD table will provide repeating 256 ms burst and 256 ms silence.
PAGE 324
Page 1282 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface – Commonwealth of Independent States TYPE FCAD Firmware Cadence table. WCAD 31 Cadence number. CDNC 0060 0060 Repeating 300 ms burst and 300 ms silence. LD 18 – Add or change Speed Call lists, System Speed Call lists, Group Call lists, Enhanced Hot Line lists, Pretranslation lists, and Special Service lists. Special Service lists can now handle the Special Service Unanswered Call (SSUC) call type.
PAGE 325
Page 1283 of 3156 Digitone Receiver Enhancements Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 326
Page 1284 of 3156 Digitone Receiver Enhancements The timer enhancement will prevent this situation from occurring by holding back outpulsing of the last digit until a half-second before end-of-dialing time out. This leaves only a half-second interval in which the far-end station could answer before speechpath is established.
PAGE 327
Digitone Receiver Enhancements Page 1285 of 3156 Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 328
Page 1286 of 3156 553-3001-306 Digitone Receiver Enhancements Standard 10.
PAGE 329
Page 1287 of 3156 Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 330
Page 1288 of 3156 Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer Operating parameters DFNR does not apply to Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls, nor does it apply to non-DID calls. The DFNR overrides the Forward Number Allowed (FNA) or Forward Number Denied (FND) Class of Service of the called party.
PAGE 331
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer Page 1289 of 3156 LD 15 – Define the Number of Ring Cycles. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add. Change. TYPE: CDB RDR Customer Data Block. gate opener. (0)-15 DID Forward No Answer Ring cycles, prompted if the FNAD prompt is not set to ATT or NO. ...
PAGE 332
Page 1290 of 3156 553-3001-306 Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer Standard 10.
PAGE 333
Page 1291 of 3156 Direct Inward Dialing Recall Features on DTI2 for Italy Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291 DID Offering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292 DID Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 334
Page 1292 of 3156 Direct Inward Dialing Recall Features on DTI2 for Italy DID Offering When a DID call placed on a DTI2 trunk terminates on a busy set, the system replies by sending an End of Selection Busy (EOSB) signal on the calling channel to inform the Public Exchange/Central Office that no further call modification will be performed. Busy tone is returned while waiting for the release signal from the Central Office (IDLE).
PAGE 335
Direct Inward Dialing Recall Features on DTI2 for Italy Page 1293 of 3156 Forward Busy The DID offering is available only after the End of Selection Busy signal has been sent by the Central Office. This signal is provided to the Central Office trunk only if the busy set is configured with Forward Busy Denied (FBD) Class of Service. Network Attendant Services (NAS) Incoming DID calls which are Offered or Recalled to the attendant may receive NAS treatment. This feature requires no modification.
PAGE 336
Page 1294 of 3156 Direct Inward Dialing Recall Features on DTI2 for Italy LDs 10/11 –Set the Class of Service to FBD. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG New or change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where aaaa = 500, SL-1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. CLS FBD Forward Busy Denied. LD 16 – Set DID Recall for this Rate. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG New, or change. TYPE RDB Route data block.
PAGE 337
Direct Inward Dialing Recall Features on DTI2 for Italy Page 1295 of 3156 INCOMING CALLS P EOSB(S) ABCD End of Selection Busy (receive) signal. - TIME (100)-150 Duration of the EOSB(S) signal in milliseconds. P OPRS(R) ABCD Operator (receive) recall signal. - TIME xxxx yyyy Time for OPRS(R) in milliseconds, where: ... xxxx = 8-(48)-2040, and yyyy = xxxx-(128)-2040. DID Recall LD 16 – Set DID Recall to Attendant for this rate. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG New, or change.
PAGE 338
Page 1296 of 3156 Direct Inward Dialing Recall Features on DTI2 for Italy LD 73 – Configure the SICA table for the DID Recall feature. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE DTI2 2 Mbit DTI. FEAT ABCD Digital signaling category table. SICA nn Sica table number. ABCD Clear Backward (send) signal. P OPRS(R) ABCD Operator (receive) recall signal. - TIME xxxx yyyy Time for OPRS(R) in milliseconds, where: ... INCOMIN G CALLS CLRB(S) ...
PAGE 339
Page 1297 of 3156 Direct Inward Dialing to TIE Connection Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 340
Page 1298 of 3156 Direct Inward Dialing to TIE Connection The DID-to-TIE Connection feature is not available on 1.5 Mbps digital, Japanese DMI, PRI2 or DPNSS trunks. Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 15 – Allow DID-to-TIE connections.
PAGE 341
Direct Inward Dialing to TIE Connection Page 1299 of 3156 Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 342
Page 1300 of 3156 553-3001-306 Direct Inward Dialing to TIE Connection Standard 10.
PAGE 343
Page 1301 of 3156 Direct Inward System Access Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 344
Page 1302 of 3156 Direct Inward System Access • Call Detail Recording (CDR) and Call Detail Recording Charge Account, and • Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection (BARS/NARS) and Automatic Number Identification (ANI) route selection. Each special Directory Number (DN) dialed by a DISA user is associated with a particular DISA Directory Number. Any number of DISA DNs can be assigned, provided that they are consistent with the numbering plan of the customer.
PAGE 345
Direct Inward System Access Page 1303 of 3156 Only trunks that give disconnect supervision can be used to provide access to DISA. Therefore, trunks dedicated to DISA (CO, FX, or WATS) must have a ground start signaling arrangement. Incoming DISA calls on trunks without disconnect supervision will not be allowed. For these calls, overflow tone is given to TIE, DID, and Common Controlled Switching Arrangement (CCSA) trunk calls, and calls on CO, FX, and WATS trunks are intercepted to the attendant.
PAGE 346
Page 1304 of 3156 Direct Inward System Access Call Detail Recording If the customer and trunk route on which the incoming DISA call is being made have the applicable Call Detail Recording (CDR) options in effect, particulars of the call are recorded when it is established. There is no special indication on the CDR record that this was a DISA call.
PAGE 347
Direct Inward System Access Page 1305 of 3156 Line Lockout Flexible Line Lockout The defined Flexible Line Lockout treatment is provided to DISA calls. New Flexible Code Restriction If the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DN has a TLD, CUN, or CTD Class of Service, calls made through DISA are eligible for NFCR treatment. Night Service Enhancements It is not possible to assign a Night Service Group Number to any trunk that is a member of a route that is set to auto-terminate on a DISA DN.
PAGE 348
Page 1306 of 3156 Direct Inward System Access LD 24 – Configure the Direct Inward System Access feature for a customer. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add, or change. TYPE DIS DISA data. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. SPWD xxxx System secure data password (0001-9999) allows modifications to the DISA data block. 0000 = disable the password (see LD 15). DN xxx...x DN for DISA access. SCOD X xx...xx DISA security code (1-8 digits). X = remove security code.
PAGE 349
Direct Inward System Access Page 1307 of 3156 LD 16 – Define an auto-terminate trunk route for Direct Inward System Access. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add, or change. TYPE RDB Route data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. ROUT xxx Trunk route number. TKTP aaa Trunk type. AUTO (NO) YES Route is not or is arranged to auto-terminate incoming calls on the DISA DN. ICOG IAO ICT OGT Incoming and outgoing trunk. ACOD xxxx Trunk route access code.
PAGE 350
Page 1308 of 3156 RTMB Direct Inward System Access xxx yyy Route number and member number, where: xxx = 0-511, and yyy = 1-254. ATDN xxx...x DISA DN on which incoming calls are to auto-terminate. SIGL GRD Ground Start signaling. Feature operation To dial into the system from the public network: 553-3001-306 1 Dial the DISA number. You hear a dial tone. 2 Dial the security code, if required. 3 Dial the Authorization Code, if required. Standard 10.
PAGE 351
Page 1309 of 3156 Direct Inward System Access on Unsupervised Trunks Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 352
Page 1310 of 3156 Direct Inward System Access on Unsupervised Trunks Operating parameters There are no operating parameters associated with this feature. Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging Direct Inward System Access (DISA) package 22. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 16 – Configure the Timed Forced Disconnect Timer. LD 16 – Configure the Timed Forced Disconnect Timer.
PAGE 353
Page 1311 of 3156 Direct Private Network Access Contents The following are topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISA Digit Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISA Recorded Announcement (RAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authcode Last Retry Request . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 1312 1312 1312 Operating parameters . . . . . .
PAGE 354
Page 1312 of 3156 Direct Private Network Access DISA Digit Insertion Once a DISA Directory Number (DN) is accessed, the Meridian 1 automatically inserts from 1 to 31 digits to save the caller from having to manually enter these digits. Dial tone is provided if the system expects to receive more digits from the caller in order to complete the call. If no additional digits are required, the call terminates automatically.
PAGE 355
Direct Private Network Access Page 1313 of 3156 All existing DISA limitations apply to the DISA Digit Insertion and DISA RAN functionalities. All existing RAN limitations apply to the DISA RAN and Authcode Last Retry functionalities. All existing Authcode Last limitations apply to the Authcode Last Retry functionality. To support DISA RAN and the Authcode Last Retry RAN function, the Meridian 1 must be equipped with all the necessary RAN hardware.
PAGE 356
Page 1314 of 3156 Direct Private Network Access Autodial If Autodial is programmed with a valid Authcode for Authcode Last followed by an octothorpe “#”, the existing Authcode Last operation will reject the Authcode as an invalid Authcode. If Authcode Last Retry is defined, the caller will be reprompted for the Authcode. Call Detail Recording Digits inserted by DISA Digit Insertion are reflected in the Call Detail Recording (CDR)record.
PAGE 357
Direct Private Network Access Page 1315 of 3156 • Network Authorization Code (NAUT) package 63 • Recorded Announcement (RAN) package 7 when an Authcode Last Retry RAN is required Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 24 – Modify the direct inward system access data block: 2 LD 88 – Modify the authorization code data block. DISA DN Data Configure RAN routes (LD 16) and RAN trunks (LD 14) as per existing procedures.
PAGE 358
Page 1316 of 3156 DGTS - DLTN Direct Private Network Access x...x Digits for DISA Digit Insertion. Up to 31 digits can be defined. (X) Removes and deactivates DISA Digit Insertion. (YES) Dial tone needed after digit insertion. NO Dial tone not needed after digit insertion. Authcode Data Configure RAN routes (LD 16) and RAN trunks (LD 14) as per existing procedures. LD 88 – Modify the authorization code data block. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG New, or change.
PAGE 359
Direct Private Network Access Page 1317 of 3156 Feature operation Operational Sequence of a DISA Call Step User Action Result 1. Dials DISA DN. If DISA Security Access Code is required, special dial tone is given, and the caller continues to Step 2. Otherwise the caller skips to Step 3. 2. Enters the Security Access Code. The dial tone is removed as soon as the first digit is dialed. If the security access code entered is valid, the caller continues to Step 3.
PAGE 360
Page 1318 of 3156 Direct Private Network Access 8. Dial tone is given and the caller continues to Step 9. 9. Dials digits to originate the call. Dial tone is removed as soon as the first digit is dialed. The dialed digits are appended into the call register (i.e., if DISA Digit Insertion is defined, the dialed digits are stored after the inserted digits), and the call is processed for call completion. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 361
Direct Private Network Access Page 1319 of 3156 Operational Sequence of Authcode Last Step User Action Result 1. Makes an outgoing call that requires Authcode Last. Authcode Last Request dial tone is given. If Authcode Last RAN is defined, RAN precedes the dial tone. The caller continues to Step 2. 2. Dials one of the following: The Authcode Last Request dial tone is removed as soon as the first digit is dialed. Then depending on the digit input, one of the following occurs: a) A valid Authcode.
PAGE 362
Page 1320 of 3156 Direct Private Network Access Example of a DPNA Call Using All Three Functions In this example, User A calls from home to a DISA DN and subsequently to an ESN number as defined in the DISA Digit Insertion. When prompted for an Authcode, User A initially enters an invalid one, before being reprompted for the authcode (See Figure 37).
PAGE 363
Page 1321 of 3156 Directory Number Delayed Ringing Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 364
Page 1322 of 3156 Directory Number Delayed Ringing Operating parameters Only Meridian 1 proprietary telephones with DN key type SCN or MCN may use this feature; analog (500/2500 type) telephones are not supported. When enabling the Directory Number Delayed Ringing feature and zero is entered as delay value, the desired Single Call Ringing or Multiple Call Ringing key must to changed to Single Call Non-Ringing (SCN) or Multiple Call Non-Ringing (MCN). The DNDR feature is enabled on a TN basis.
PAGE 365
Directory Number Delayed Ringing Page 1323 of 3156 Attendant Recall Automatic Timed Reminder Recalls If a dialed set has DNDR defined, and an attendant re-extends a call without releasing it, the DNDR timing is not reset. If the value of the recall timer is less than that of the DNDR timer, the call is recalled to the attendant before audible notification begins. Attendant Recall Enhancement With this feature, when a call to a set is recalled to the attendant, the ringing is stopped on that set.
PAGE 366
Page 1324 of 3156 Directory Number Delayed Ringing Data Calls Private Line Ringing (PVN) Private Line Non-Ringing Set-Based Administration Enhancements These features are not supported by the Directory Number Delayed Ringing feature. Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing The DNDR feature applies to the Distinctive Ringing feature; what applies to normal ringing with DNDR also applies to distinctive ringing.
PAGE 367
Directory Number Delayed Ringing Page 1325 of 3156 Spanish KD3 Forced Disconnect Spanish KD3 Digital Trunk Signaling Direct Inward Dialing (DID) disconnects an incoming call if the destination does not answer in 60 seconds. If the DNDR delay is set to a value of more than 60 seconds, the KD3 DID will terminate the call and the destination never receives the audible notification.
PAGE 368
Page 1326 of 3156 Directory Number Delayed Ringing LD 11 – Configure the delay value (in seconds). Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add, or change. TYPE aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. (0)-120 Delay value in seconds. A DNDR value of zero disables the feature. If the DNDR value is an odd number, it is rounded up to the next even number. ...
PAGE 369
Page 1327 of 3156 Directory Number Expansion Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 370
Page 1328 of 3156 Directory Number Expansion • Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) steering codes • Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) DNs • ACD position IDs • Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DNs • Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) hold DNs • Release Link Trunk (RLT) DNs in Centralized Attendant Service) • System Park DNs • Test line DNs, and • Data service DNs.
PAGE 371
Directory Number Expansion Page 1329 of 3156 If a message is sent to an Auxiliary Processor (AUX) that is not capable of handling expanded DNs, only the last four digits are included in the message. Incoming Digit Conversion (IDC) translates a maximum of four digits only. The Automatic Number Identification (ANI) calling number is always seven digits long.
PAGE 372
Page 1330 of 3156 Directory Number Expansion ACD Load Management ACD Load Management commands have been modified to allow longer DNrelated fields (ACD DN, position ID, route access code). Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing The Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD) station identifier and trunk identifier remains four digits long. If the total number of digits in the AIOD prefix and internal DN exceeds four, only the leading digits of the station DN are retained as the AIOD identifier.
PAGE 373
Directory Number Expansion Page 1331 of 3156 Coordinated Dialing Plan Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) steering codes are expanded to a maximum of seven digits. The maximum number of digits for a complete CDP DN has increased from seven to ten (a three-digit steering code followed by a sevendigit internal DN). With DNXP, the maximum number of leading digits to be deleted from a Local Steering Code (LSC) is expanded to seven digits, due to longer CDP numbers.
PAGE 374
Page 1332 of 3156 Directory Number Expansion Night Service If the Directory Number Expansion (DNPX) package is equipped, the Night DNs can be up to seven digits; otherwise, the DN can be a maximum of four digits. Single Appearance Directory Number The DN can have up to seven digits if the Directory Number Expansion package is equipped. Feature packaging Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 has no other feature package dependencies.
PAGE 375
Page 1333 of 3156 Directory Number Refer to the following feature modules in this book for information on Directory Number: • “Directory Number Delayed Ringing” on page 1321 • “Directory Number Expansion” on page 1327 • “Flexible Attendant Directory Number” on page 1499 • “Listed Directory Numbers” on page 1911 • “Multiple Appearance Directory Number” on page 2209 • “Prime Directory Number” on page 2599 • “Single Appearance Directory Number” on page 2891 For Network-Wide Listed Directory Numb
PAGE 376
Page 1334 of 3156 553-3001-306 Directory Number Standard 10.
PAGE 377
Page 1335 of 3156 Distinctive Ringing by DN Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 378
Page 1336 of 3156 Distinctive Ringing by DN A sub prompt for every DN key configures distinctive ringing index for incoming and outgoing calls. There are two available features for incoming and outgoing calls: • Distinctive Ringing by call source, per DN-key: The distinctive ringing given to the called set is determined by the call source (calling set).
PAGE 379
Distinctive Ringing by DN Page 1337 of 3156 The functionality of DRDN is limited to the following DN-keys; otherwise, normal ringing is given.
PAGE 380
Page 1338 of 3156 Distinctive Ringing by DN Call Forward No Answer, Second Level The ringing cadence for all telephones in a chain of call redirections remains the same as for the original DN called. When CFNA is activated for a set, distinctive ringing is given to the called set if the originator set is configured with DRDN, otherwise normal ringing is given. Call Transfer The ringing of the redirected call is determined by the set that has originated the call and not by the set transferring the call.
PAGE 381
Distinctive Ringing by DN Page 1339 of 3156 Hunting Hunting occurs when the called set is busy. If the originating set is configured with DRDN the called set rings distinctively. A called set on a network call will ring distinctively with the cadence determined by the ringing index received across the network. Enhanced Hotline Enhanced Hotline DN-keys are required to support the functionality of the DRDN feature.
PAGE 382
Page 1340 of 3156 Distinctive Ringing by DN • Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) package 145 • Integrated Service Digital Network International (ISDN_INTL_SUP), package 161 Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 56 – Define the ringing cadence for analog (500/2500 type) sets, network and the distinctive ringing tone for Meridian 1 proprietary sets.
PAGE 383
Distinctive Ringing by DN NDR2 BCS Page 1341 of 3156 Network Distinctive Ring 2 cadence for Meridian 1 proprietary sets. - XTON 0-(2)-15 NT8D17 TDS Tone code. - XCAD 0-(2)-15 NT8D17 TDS Cadence code. NDR3 PBX 0-(2)-15 Network Distinctive Ring 3 cadence for analog (500/2500 type) sets. NDR3 BCS Network Distinctive Ring 3 cadence for Meridian 1 proprietary sets. - XTON 0-(2)-15 NT8D17 TDS Tone code. - XCAD 0-(2)-15 NT8D17 TDS Cadence code.
PAGE 384
Page 1342 of 3156 Distinctive Ringing by DN DES d...d Office Data Administration System (ODAS) Station Designator of 1-6 alphanumeric characters. CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15. xx = 0-99 for Options 51C - 81C. xx = 0-31 for Option 11C. CLS DRDA Distinctive Ringing by DN enabled. (DRDD) is the default. ... ... KEY xx aaa yyyy ... Telephone function key assignments for this feature, where: • xx = key number. • aaa = key type for this feature.
PAGE 385
Page 1343 of 3156 Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343 New Distinctive Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344 Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 386
Page 1344 of 3156 Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing New Distinctive Ringing This feature provides a new ringing cadence of 0.512 on and 0.512 off, followed by 1.024 on and 4.096 off, for all telephone types. Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom This feature allows a user to differentiate between an incoming call and a Dial Intercom call. The Dial Intercom ringing has a different cadence than regular Directory Number (DN) ringing or Distinctive Ringing.
PAGE 387
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing Page 1345 of 3156 Call Waiting Redirection The existing Distinctive Ringing Call Forward No Answer feature is applied to calls from a Distinctive Ringing enabled trunk. If such an incoming call is receiving Call Waiting treatment on sets with Distinctive Ringing, Call Forward No Answer (CFNA), and the Call Waiting Redirection feature enabled, the DFNA timer is applied to the call instead of the CFNA timer.
PAGE 388
Page 1346 of 3156 Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing For example, suppose New Distinctive Ringing is enabled and a call comes in from a Distinctive Ringing enabled trunk. If the call terminates on a Meridian digital telephone with DR2 Class of Service, it rings with DR2 (frequency and warble tone), but with a cadence of 0.512 on and 0.512 off, followed by 1.024 on and 4.096 off. This also applies to the M3000 Touchphone. If the M3000 custom ringing option is selected, Distinctive Ringing is overridden.
PAGE 389
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing Page 1347 of 3156 Distinctive Ringing for digital telephones is included in Digital Telephones (DSET) package 88. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section 1 LD 15 – Enable or disable Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom calls and specify Call Forward No Answer timing for trunks with Distinctive Ringing. 2 LD 17 – Specify Distinctive or New Distinctive Ringing.
PAGE 390
Page 1348 of 3156 Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing LD 17 – Specify Distinctive or New Distinctive Ringing. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE CFN PARM Configuration Record. System parameters. PARM (NO) YES Change system parameters. - NDRG (NO) YES (Disable) enable New Distinctive Ringing (DRNG). Prompted only if DRNG is equipped. LD 16 – Enable or disable Distinctive Ringing for each incoming or incoming/outgoing trunk route. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change.
PAGE 391
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing Page 1349 of 3156 LD 11 – Specify Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing Class of Service for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. CLS DRGX Distinctive ring type (DRG1), DRG2, DRG3, DRG4, where: DRG1 = high fast tone, frequency 667/500 Hz.
PAGE 392
Page 1350 of 3156 553-3001-306 Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing Standard 10.
PAGE 393
Page 1351 of 3156 Do Not Disturb Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 394
Page 1352 of 3156 Do Not Disturb Calls will receive the customer-specified intercept treatment (e.g., busy tone, Recorded Announcement (RAN), or attendant). An enhancement to DND provides the ability to route calls to the Hunt DN instead of to the intercept treatment. Table 41 lists possible intercept treatments based on responses to the prompts Do Not Disturb Intercept Treatment (DNDT) and Do Not Disturb Hunt (DNDH) in LD 15.
PAGE 395
Do Not Disturb Page 1353 of 3156 Table 41 Do Not Disturb intercept treatments (Part 2 of 2) DNDT = BST Call type Hunt Meridian 1 proprietary telephone DNDT = RAN DNDT = ATT DNDH No DNDH Yes DNDH No DNDH Yes DNDH No DNDH Yes Allow B H B H B H Deny B B B B B B Allow H H R H H H Deny B B R R A A Allow B H R H A H Deny B B R R A A Internal Analog (500/ 2500 type) telephone Meridian 1 proprietary telephone H = Follow Hunt Directory Number (DN) A = Intercep
PAGE 396
Page 1354 of 3156 Do Not Disturb To enable Group Do Not Disturb (DNDG), the DNDI package must be equipped. DNDI allows the user to activate, cancel, and verify the presence of the feature. A separate Group Do Not Disturb (DNDG) key is assigned to each Attendant Console for activating the DNDG feature. Operating parameters A maximum of 100 groups (0-99) can be defined per customer. Each group can contain up to 127 DNs. A maximum of 20 DNDG keys can be equipped on an M2250 Attendant Console.
PAGE 397
Do Not Disturb Page 1355 of 3156 Attendant Break-In For a telephone with Do Not Disturb in effect, Break-In is temporarily denied to the attendant. The Break-In lamp uses slow flash to indicate this situation. Using the Break-In key prior to dialing the destination DN circumvents this situation. After the Break-In, the telephone returns to its prior status.
PAGE 398
Page 1356 of 3156 Do Not Disturb China – Attendant Monitor If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which has Do Not Disturb activated and is idle, idle DN treatment is given. Digital Private Signaling System #1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion Executive Intrusion is not allowed if either of these features is active at the requested party. Directory Number Expansion If the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package is equipped, DNs can have up to seven digits.
PAGE 399
Do Not Disturb Page 1357 of 3156 • Dial a DN from the ICT. • Press the DND IND key once more, and terminate the procedure by pressing the Release key on the Attendant Console. The same approach applies when cancelling Do Not Disturb for a set. To override Do Not Disturb for an extension DN: • Press an idle Loop key on the Attendant Console. • Dial a DN from the Intercept Computer (ICT). Press the DND IND key on the Attendant Console.
PAGE 400
Page 1358 of 3156 Do Not Disturb Network Intercom Hot Type I calls ignore the Do Not Disturb feature. Hot Line calls are presented to the defined target, even when DND is activated. Night Station A Night Station DN can be placed in DND mode. Override Priority Override Telephones with DND enabled cannot be overridden. Overflow (fast busy) tone is returned to telephones attempting Priority Override. Private Line Service DND cannot be used on Private Lines.
PAGE 401
Do Not Disturb Page 1359 of 3156 5 LD 12 – Add or change Individual or Group Do Not Disturb keys on an Attendant Console. 6 LD 10 – Enable or disable lamp for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. LD 15 – Specify the treatment received by calls to a number in Do Not Disturb mode. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE CDB FTR Customer Data Block. Gate opener. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. - DNDL (NO) YES Do Not Disturb lamp for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
PAGE 402
Page 1360 of 3156 Do Not Disturb LD 26 – Add or change a Group Do Not Disturb. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG REM Change, remove DN in DND group. TYPE DND Do Not Disturb Group data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. GPNO 0-99 DND group to be added or changed. STOR xxx...x DN to be added or changed in the DND group; repeat to add other DNs. RMOV xxx...x DN to be removed from a DND group. Prompted if REQ = REM. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 403
Do Not Disturb Page 1361 of 3156 LD 26 – Merge one or more defined Do Not Disturb groups into another DND group, retaining their status as groups. Prompt Response Description REQ MRG CHG REM OUT Merge DND groups. Add a DND group from a list of merged DND groups. Remove DND group from a merged group. Remove a DND group that consists of a list of merged DND groups. TYPE DND Do Not Disturb Group data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C.
PAGE 404
Page 1362 of 3156 Do Not Disturb LD 26 – Print Do Not Disturb group data. Prompt Response Description REQ PRT Print. TYPE DND Do Not Disturb Group data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. GPNO 0-99 DND group to be printed. Print all DND group data. LD 12 – Add or change Individual or Group Do Not Disturb keys on an Attendant Console. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE ATT 1250 2250 Console type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C.
PAGE 405
Do Not Disturb Page 1363 of 3156 LD 10 – Enable or disable lamp for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: 500 Telephone type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. CLS (LPD) LPA (CCSD) CCSA (Disable) enable lamp. Controlled Class of Service (denied) allowed. Feature operation Individual Do Not Disturb To activate DNDI using the DNDI key (Attendant Console): 1 Select an idle loop key. 2 Press DNDI.
PAGE 406
Page 1364 of 3156 Do Not Disturb Group Do Not Disturb There are two ways to activate DNDG: with the DNDG key or with the DNDI key. To activate DNDG using the DNDG key (Attendant Console): 1 Press DNDG. This key already has a defined group assigned to it. The associated indicator remains steadily lit to indicate that all telephones in that DND group are in DND mode. 2 Press Rls. To deactivate DNDG: • Press DNDG.
PAGE 407
1368 Page 1365 of 3156 Dual Signaling on Analog Trunks Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 408
Page 1366 of 3156 Dual Signaling on Analog Trunks Prior to the introduction of Dual Signaling on Analog Trunks, a similar functionality was available when trunks were programmed for DTMF signaling. Dial Pulse calls, if received, were analyzed and handled by the Tone and Digit Switch or Extended Conference and Tone Service card. A DTR was reserved, needlessly, for the duration of the signaling. The following diagram shows one application of the feature. Figure 38 Meridian 1 connected to the C.O.
PAGE 409
Dual Signaling on Analog Trunks Page 1367 of 3156 If Dual Signaling on Analog Trunks is used on a trunk with DPDT programmed, a DTR is not involved with incoming trunk traffic. This feature is available on analog DID and TIE trunks only. CLS DPDT/DTDP can only be configured on routes with the ICOG prompt set to IAO (incoming and outgoing). Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software.
PAGE 410
Page 1368 of 3156 553-3001-306 Dual Signaling on Analog Trunks Standard 10.
PAGE 411
Page 1387 of 3156 Electronic Switched Network Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388 Basic Authorization Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388 Basic Alternate Route Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388 Call Back Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 412
Page 1388 of 3156 Electronic Switched Network Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396 Feature implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398 Feature operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 413
Electronic Switched Network Page 1389 of 3156 Call Back Queuing Call Back Queuing (CBQ) is an optional feature available to systems equipped with the Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection (BARS/NARS) or Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) features. If all facilities are busy when an individual places a BARS, NARS, or CDP call, Call Back Queuing (CBQ) enables the individual to invoke the Ring Again (RGA) feature and receive a callback from the system when a facility becomes available.
PAGE 414
Page 1390 of 3156 Electronic Switched Network Coordinated Call Back Queuing Against Main Coordinated Call Back Queuing Against Main (CCBQAM) is an enhancement to the CCBQ feature that allows a station at the Node to be offered CBQ if a call is blocked at the Main. When facilities become available at the Main, the call originator at the Node is alerted by a callback from the Main.
PAGE 415
Electronic Switched Network • 00 • 01 • 011 Page 1391 of 3156 Flexible ESN “0” Routing is part of the existing BARS (57) and Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) (58) packages and has no interaction with other features besides these. Since NARS has two translation tables, two Flexible ESN “0” Routing data blocks will be included in NARS. This means that a call could be configured to route in two different ways. This feature is applicable to all route types and network types supported by ESN.
PAGE 416
Page 1392 of 3156 Electronic Switched Network Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion (ITGE) provides full ten-digit restriction for NPA and SPN codes, seven-digit restriction for NXX codes, and threedigit restriction for Location Code (LOC) codes. Detailed information on this enhancement is provided in the Basic and Network Alternate Route Selection: Description (553-2751-100).
PAGE 417
Electronic Switched Network Page 1393 of 3156 Off-Net numbers that terminate at an ESN Node or Main, or at a Conventional Main, can be routed through the private network by means of TIE trunks. BARS/NARS Off-Net Number Recognition prevents unnecessary TO and FROM terminations through CO trunks, at the terminating end, when a caller dials a DID or Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) call to a location in the private network.
PAGE 418
Page 1394 of 3156 Electronic Switched Network Network Call Transfer Network Call Transfer (NXFER) enhances the operation of Call Transfer (XFER) between two switches when a call is transferred back to the originating switch. The regular Call Transfer feature requires two TIE trunks to complete the call.
PAGE 419
Electronic Switched Network • Page 1395 of 3156 ETN switch to Meridian 1 Node Information transmitted and received from one switch to another can include the following: • Call type • Called number • Network Class of Service (NCOS) • Traveling Class of Service (TCOS) • Traveling Class Mark (TCM) • Queue identification number (for CCBQ) NSIG operates within the following parameters: • A Main can connect to only one Node, and both switches must be equipped with the NSIG feature.
PAGE 420
Page 1396 of 3156 Electronic Switched Network Off Hook Queuing Off Hook Queuing (OHQ) is an optional feature available at any switch equipped with BARS, NARS, or CDP. If all facilities are busy when an individual places a BARS, NARS, or CDP call, the OHQ feature enables the individual to wait off hook for a programmed length of time until a facility becomes available. OHQ is described in the Network Queuing: Description (553-2751-101).
PAGE 421
Electronic Switched Network Page 1397 of 3156 Network Authorization Code (NAUT) package 63 requires: • Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB) package 24 • Basic Authorization Code (BAUT) package 25 and at least one of the following: • Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) package 57 • Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) package 58 or • Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) package 59 Network Call Transfer (NXFR) package 67 requires: • Network Class of Service (NCOS) package 32 • Network Signa
PAGE 422
Page 1398 of 3156 Electronic Switched Network and at least one of the following: • Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) package 57, or • Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) package 58 Feature implementation Refer to the appropriate Nortel Networks technical publication for each ESN feature. Feature operation Refer to the appropriate Nortel Networks technical publication for each ESN feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 423
Page 1369 of 3156 Electronic Brandlining Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369 Incremental Software Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370 Custom Displays . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 424
Page 1370 of 3156 Electronic Brandlining The display screen of a Meridian Modular set contains two lines with 24 character spaces on each line. Previously, the second line on the display screen of an idle Meridian Modular set was blank. With the Electronic Brandlining feature, however, a custom display is shown left justified on the second line of the idle display screen.
PAGE 425
Electronic Brandlining Page 1371 of 3156 In order for Option 11C and IODU/C customers to expand ISM limits, they must order and install a new keycode. This installation is performed using the Keycode Management feature. All Keycode Management commands are executed in Overlay 143. To make the expansion effective, the customer must sysload. For further information on keycode installation, please refer to Software Conversion Procedures (553-2001-320).
PAGE 426
Page 1372 of 3156 Electronic Brandlining Figure 39 An idle Meridian Modular display screen with a customized brandline displayed JAN 02 10:15 P ALEXANDER G BELL TELECOM RLS HOLD 1 2ABC 3DEF 4GHI 5JKL 6MNO 7PRS 8TUV 9WXY 0 553-7353.EPS In addition to displaying a customized brandline, the Terminal Text Broadcast functionality can also be used to broadcast a customized text string on the idle display screen of a Meridian Modular set.
PAGE 427
Electronic Brandlining Page 1373 of 3156 To enter the customized brandline or text string in Overlay 17, use one of the following methods: • Enter a line of supported characters followed by a Carriage Return () at the IDLE_DISP_STRING prompt in Overlay 17. • Enter a valid character one at a time using either a supported character or its two digit hexadecimal representation at the IDLE_DISP_CHAR prompt in Overlay 17.
PAGE 428
Page 1374 of 3156 Electronic Brandlining Supported characters Table 42 lists the 7-bit ASCII Roman characters and the corresponding hexadecimal representations that are supported by the Electronic Brandlining feature. Table 42 Valid 7-bit ASCII Roman Characters 553-7373.EPS 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 429
Electronic Brandlining Page 1375 of 3156 Table 43 lists the 8-bit non-ASCII Roman characters and the corresponding hexadecimal representations that are supported by the Electronic Brandlining feature. Table 43 Valid 8-bit non-ASCII Roman Characters 553-7369.EPS Note: Characters that are listed in Tables 42 and 43 are available with North American Version 18 firmware. Individual TTYs may not match the characters and hexadecimal representations in the same way as shown in Tables 42 and 43.
PAGE 430
Page 1376 of 3156 Electronic Brandlining Default Electronic Brandlining Display If the Terminal Text Broadcast custom display is not chosen, then the Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter value indexes into a default brandline. The default brandline is “NORTEL”, the Meridian Modular set manufacturer (Nortel Networks). This default brandline is displayed left justified on the second line of the idle display screen of a Meridian Modular set.
PAGE 431
Electronic Brandlining Page 1377 of 3156 Operating parameters The Electronic Brandlining feature applies to Meridian Modular sets that are equipped with a display screen and the appropriate Meridian Modular display firmware. Meridian Modular sets include: M2008, M2016, M2616, M2216ACD1, and M2216ACD2. The Meridian Modular display firmware, North American Version 18 (Three Language Display) or later, is required for Meridian Modular sets to use the Electronic Brandlining feature.
PAGE 432
Page 1378 of 3156 Electronic Brandlining If the MLIO package is not restricted and a 7-bit TTY is used, the 8-bit supported characters cannot be printed correctly. Instead, the service change administration interfaces may print garbage characters and/or the interfaces may lock. When the MLIO package is not restricted, the system sends the valid 8-bit characters to the TTY, rather than the underscore characters.
PAGE 433
Electronic Brandlining Page 1379 of 3156 No changes are made to the features which currently output information on the second line of the idle display screen of a Meridian Modular set. These features and their output have precedence over the Electronic Brandlining feature. The following idle screens take precedence over the Electronic Brandlining feature: Automatic Answerback, Call Forward, Logged Out, Make Set Busy, Not Ready, and Overflow Busy.
PAGE 434
Page 1380 of 3156 Electronic Brandlining Display key When the Display (DSP) key is first pressed, the display screen is blank. When any other key is pressed after the DSP key is pressed, all relevant information is displayed. The Electronic Brandlining custom display is not displayed during the DSP key process until Lamp Audit updates the display screen with the time and date (when applicable).
PAGE 435
Electronic Brandlining Page 1381 of 3156 Set Based Administration When a service change is made by Set Based Administration (SBA), the downloading of the time, date, and the Electronic Brandlining custom display (if applicable) is induced. Set Relocation Automatic Set Relocation (ASR) and Modular Telephone Relocation (MTR) include the “plugging in” of a Meridian Modular set for its feature operation.
PAGE 436
Page 1382 of 3156 Electronic Brandlining LD 17 – Configure the NORTEL Electronic Brandline. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change existing data. TYPE PARM System Parameters. (YES) “NORTEL” Electronic Brandline is displayed (default). “NORTEL” Electronic Brandline is not displayed. ... NORTEL_BRAND NO NORTEL_BRAND is only prompted when the ISM parameter is set to the default value. LD 17 – Enter a customized text string.
PAGE 437
Electronic Brandlining - - PWD2 x...x - - SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY (YES) NO - - - IDLE_DISP_STRING bbbb Page 1383 of 3156 Password 2. The second level administration password is needed to allow configuration of the Terminal Text Broadcast customized text string. Change customized text string by text string input. Enter YES to input by text string, and the IDLE_DISP_STRING prompt is prompted. Enter NO to input character by character, and the IDLE_DISP_CHAR nn prompt is prompted.
PAGE 438
Page 1384 of 3156 Electronic Brandlining - - - IDLE_DISP_CHAR nn Enter the customized text string character by character. c c = one supported character hh hh = 2 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, af), representing a supported character. nn (01-24) is the position of the character in the customized text string. The IDLE_DISP_CHAR prompt is only prompted if SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY = NO. It is reprompted until only is entered or until nn is the 24th character that has been entered.
PAGE 439
Electronic Brandlining Page 1385 of 3156 LD 11 – Enable the display on a Meridian Modular set. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where aaaa is: 2008, 2016, 2216, 2616. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. (ADD) DDS Digit Display options Automatic Digit Display (default). Delay Display. When CLS = DDS, the display is activated after the call is answered. ... CLS ...
PAGE 440
Page 1386 of 3156 553-3001-306 Electronic Brandlining Standard 10.
PAGE 441
Page 1399 of 3156 Emergency Services Access Emergency Services Access (ESA) is a feature that places a customer in compliance with new federal legislation that requires the Private 911 type of functionality provided by ESA. Please note, however, that the ESA feature is also generally useful for users who are not subject to legislation, and is broad enough to be used in different countries.
PAGE 442
Page 1400 of 3156 553-3001-306 Emergency Services Access Standard 10.
PAGE 443
Page 1401 of 3156 End of Selection Busy Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 444
Page 1402 of 3156 End of Selection Busy Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 16 – Create or modify data for trunk routes. LD 16 – Create or modify data for trunk routes. Prompt Response Description BSY End of Selection (EOS) and BSY signals are enabled. ...
PAGE 445
Page 1403 of 3156 End of Selection Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 446
Page 1404 of 3156 End of Selection The End of Selection feature is available with either the QPC357 or NTD9447 pack for analog trunks, or the QPC536 pack for 2 Mbit digital trunks. It is not available on 1.5 Mbit digital trunks or Japanese DMI trunks. If the DN size is specified, the End of Selection feature allows a trunk to be locked out if the correct number of digits are not received, or if termination has not been completed when the correct number of digits have been received.
PAGE 447
Page 1405 of 3156 End-of-dialing on Direct Inward/Outward Dialing Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 448
Page 1406 of 3156 End-of-dialing on Direct Inward/Outward Dialing Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131. Feature implementation No change to existing configuration is required for the End-of-dialing on Direct Inward/Outward Dialing feature. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 449
Page 1407 of 3156 End-to-End Signaling Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407 Attendant End-to-End Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408 EES Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 450
Page 1408 of 3156 End-to-End Signaling An outgoing connection from a digital telephone is considered established after the end of dialing time is elapsed. Alternatively, an outgoing call can be established after the end of dialing time is elapsed, or can be established immediately by pressing an octothorpe (#) after the last digit is dialed. Attendant End-to-End Signaling The attendant can send DTMF tones to either the source or destination party using the AEES key on the Attendant Console.
PAGE 451
End-to-End Signaling Page 1409 of 3156 There is a 5.4 dB difference between when EEST is set to YES (provide endto-end signaling feedback tone) and when it is set to NO (provide no tone). An attenuation of 5.4 dB using the conference pads is applied to the EES tone if user feedback is to be given. EES Feature interactions Agent/All Observe In the Agent/All Observe mode, a supervisor, agent, and customer are all in a conference call. This feature uses Conference EES.
PAGE 452
Page 1410 of 3156 End-to-End Signaling Call Party Name Display When entered after a call is answered, EES digits are displayed immediately following the CPND name of the connected party. Leading DN digits and name characters may be shifted out of the display window. Conference End-to-End Signaling Improved EES does not apply when the parties are in a conference call.
PAGE 453
End-to-End Signaling Page 1411 of 3156 Stored Number Redial End-to-End Signaling (EES) activates after a call to a trunk is established by expiration of the end-of-dial timer. Further digits dialed are not stored by the SNR feature once it is in EES mode. AEES Feature interactions Attendant Administration While in the Attendant Administration mode, pressing the AEES key is ignored. Attendant Barge-In Attendant Busy Verify While in the Barge-In/Busy Verify mode, the console cannot enter AEES mode.
PAGE 454
Page 1412 of 3156 End-to-End Signaling Interposition call When an attendant is actively connected to another console using Interposition Attendant Call, AEES is blocked. During an Interposition Call Transfer, however, the console that is actively connected to a telephone can perform AEES, provided the party connected to the other Attendant Console is excluded. Meridian Hospitality Voice Services - Digit Key Attendant End-to-End Signaling and Digit Key are mutually exclusive.
PAGE 455
End-to-End Signaling Page 1413 of 3156 LD 15 – Enable End-to-End Signaling tone feedback. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: FTR Features and Options. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. - EEST (NO) YES NO = No EES feedback tone is given to the telephone. YES = EES feedback tone is given; the type is defined by the DTMF prompt. For Option 11, DTMF should be set to NO. - DTMF (NO) YES NO = Use EES for single feedback tone. YES = Use EES for DTMF feedback tone.
PAGE 456
Page 1414 of 3156 End-to-End Signaling LD 56 – Specify the cadence for the EES feedback tone. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG NEW Change, or add. TYPE FTC Flexible Tones and Cadences. TABL x FTC table number. HCCT YES Hardware Controlled Cadence. EEST No response expected; this is an informational prompt. - TDSH i bb cc tt TDS external, burst, cadence, and tone. - XTON 0-255 NT8D17 TDS tone code. - XCAD 0-255 NT8D17 cadence code for FCAD.
PAGE 457
1418 Page 1415 of 3156 End-to-End Signaling Display Enhancement Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 458
Page 1416 of 3156 End-to-End Signaling Display Enhancement With the EESDSP feature enabled, the user's display shows all the EES digits as dialed. EES digits display when you enter them after a call is answered. The digits appear following the Call Party Name Display (CPND) name of the connected party. Initial digits and name characters may move out of the display window if necessary. With the EESDSP feature disabled, the user's display does not change, keeping the established call information.
PAGE 459
End-to-End Signaling Display Enhancement Page 1417 of 3156 Call Party Name Display (CPND) With the EESDSP option enabled, EES digits appear after the Call Party Name Display (CPND) name of the connected party. Initial digits and name characters may move out of the display window if necessary. With the EESDSP option disabled, the set display does not change from the established CPND display.
PAGE 460
Page 1418 of 3156 End-to-End Signaling Display Enhancement LD 15 – Enable the End-to-End Signaling Display Enhancement feature. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change existing data. TYPE: FTR Customer Features and options. CUST xx Customer number. .... .... EEST EES Tone to originating party. Do not send feedback to the originator. Send feedback tone to the originator. (NO) YES Enhanced EES signaling is provided when EEST=YES and DTMF=NO. - DTMF (YES) NO EES feedback tone.
PAGE 461
Page 1419 of 3156 Enhanced Maintenance (Patching) Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 462
Page 1420 of 3156 Enhanced Maintenance (Patching) Feature packaging International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131. Feature implementation There are no specific implementation procedures for this feature. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 463
Page 1421 of 3156 Enhanced Night Service Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421 Normal Night Service . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422 Group Night Service . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 464
Page 1422 of 3156 Enhanced Night Service The customer will also be able to define whether the Night Waiting tone will be given to Night stations. With Night Call Waiting tone allowed, busy Night stations are notified when an incoming call is terminating on them. The incoming call will be queued on the Night station until it becomes idle. When the Night station becomes idle the incoming call will be presented.
PAGE 465
Enhanced Night Service Page 1423 of 3156 • Enhanced Night Service is permanently activated if the system has no attendant and the ENS option is set to YES. In this case, the Night Service Option Number can only be programmed from the Customer Data block (LD 15). • Enhanced Night Service makes use of only one Speed Call list as the Night Number Table. • The operation of the optional Night Call Waiting Tone is the same as those of the Call Waiting Tone.
PAGE 466
Page 1424 of 3156 Enhanced Night Service Multi-Party Operations Enhanced Night Service allows a mis-operated call involving a Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunk to queue at the Night Service DN. Multi-Tenant Service Any restrictions that exist in the system preventing individual tenant access to certain routes will not be checked when programming the Night Number Table. It will be up to the craftsperson to ensure all such restrictions are taken into consideration.
PAGE 467
Enhanced Night Service Page 1425 of 3156 Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 18 – Configure the Night Number Table as follows. 2 LD 15 – Configure Enhanced Night Service. 3 LD 14 – Configure Enhanced Night Service for trunks. LD 18 – Configure the Night Number Table as follows. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG New, or change. TYPE SCL Speed Call List number. LSNO xxx List Number.
PAGE 468
Page 1426 of 3156 Enhanced Night Service LD 15 – Configure Enhanced Night Service. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG New, or change. TYPE: CDB NIT Customer Data Block. Gate opener. - ENS (NO) YES (Disable) enable Enhanced Night Service. - - NWT (NO) YES (Disable) enable Night Waiting tone. - - NNT 0-253 Enter the Speed Call List number defined as the Night Number Table in LD 18. - - NSO 0-9 Night Service Option number. ... LD 14 – Configure Enhanced Night Service for trunks.
PAGE 469
Enhanced Night Service Page 1427 of 3156 Feature operation Attendant Console This section describes the sequences to be followed by the attendant to select and query the Night Service Option and to activate Enhanced Night Service. 1 Press Loop key Indicator Activated. 2 Press Night key Indicator flashes, and dial tone is received. Current Night Service Option number is displayed. 3a Query Only Press RLS key Indicator next to Loop and Night keys deactivates. Display is cleared.
PAGE 470
Page 1428 of 3156 553-3001-306 Enhanced Night Service Standard 10.
PAGE 471
Page 1429 of 3156 Equal Access Compliance Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requirements . . . . . . Equal Access dialing plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 472
Page 1430 of 3156 Equal Access Compliance Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requirements FCC Part 68 regulations require that any equipment or software manufactured or imported on or after April 17, 1992, and installed by any aggregator, must allow all users to use Equal Access codes to selectively access the long distance carrier of their choice.
PAGE 473
Equal Access Compliance Page 1431 of 3156 Legend: CAC = Carrier Access Code (101XXXX) NPA = Numbering Plan Area (area code in the North American Numbering Plan) NXX = end-office code (N = any digit except 0 or 1; X = any digit (0–9)) XXXX = any four digits CC = Country Code NN = National Number Route types Equal Access Compliance supports COT, FEX, WAT, DID, and TIE routes. A TIE route is supported only if standard signaling is specified in LD 16 (SIGO = STD).
PAGE 474
Page 1432 of 3156 Equal Access Compliance BARS/NARS routing Equal Access determines restrictions without looking at a call’s originating type (ESN or Direct Access). Routing has no effect on Equal Access call restriction: calls receive the same restriction treatment whether they originate from a trunk access code or from BARS/NARS. Equal Access is not a BARS/NARS feature and does not require BARS/NARS dialing.
PAGE 475
Equal Access Compliance 6 LD 11 – Assign a NCOS to a Digital Telephone. 7 LD 16 – Enable Equal Access for this route. Page 1433 of 3156 Carrier Identification Code Expansion supports and extends the General Carrier Restriction method of blocking calls. Given the expansion in the number of Carrier Identification Codes (CIC), it is no longer practical to support Selective Carrier Restriction functionality.
PAGE 476
Page 1434 of 3156 Equal Access Compliance LD 17 – Set OCAC as appropriate. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change existing route data. TYPE CFN PARM Route Data Block. Configuration Record. System parameters. PARM YES Change system parameters. - NDRG (NO) YES (Disable) enable new distinctive ringing. - OCAC (NO) YES Support original CAC format (must be set to YES during interim period, NO following interim period). LD 86 – Set the route list index to Route 10.
PAGE 477
Equal Access Compliance Page 1435 of 3156 FEAT NET Network translation table entry. TRAN AC1 Access code 1 is used to originate the Equal Access calls. TYPE SPN SPN translation entry. SPN 101 SPN (Equal Access code). RLI 100 Use route list index 100 to route Equal Access calls. LD 87 – Configure a NCOS for Equal Access. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change NCTL data. CUST 0 Customer number. FEAT NCTL Change NCTL block. NCOS 4 Network Class of Service group number.
PAGE 478
Page 1436 of 3156 Equal Access Compliance LD 11 – Assign a NCOS to a Digital Telephone. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change existing set data. TYPE: aaa Specify set type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. NCOS 4 Network Class of Service group number. LD 16 – Enable Equal Access for this route. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change existing route data. TYPE RDB Change Route Data Block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Specify customer number. For Option 11C.
PAGE 479
Equal Access Compliance Page 1437 of 3156 Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 480
Page 1438 of 3156 553-3001-306 Equal Access Compliance Standard 10.
PAGE 481
Page 1439 of 3156 Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Contents The following are topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seizure acknowledgment on outgoing traffic . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of dialing on DOD . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interdigit timer on DID . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End-of-selection signal on DID . . .
PAGE 482
Page 1440 of 3156 Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Call blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Number Reception message . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Feature interactions . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 483
Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Page 1441 of 3156 End-of-selection signal on DID To provide this functionality, a new outgoing SSD message, “End of Signaling”, has been defined. The End-of-selection (EOS) prompt in LD 16 has to be configured to BSY or YES. End-of-selection busy signal on DID To provide this functionality, a new Outgoing SSD message “End of Signaling Busy”, has been defined. The End of Selection (EOS) prompt in LD 16 has to be configured to BSY.
PAGE 484
Page 1442 of 3156 Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Static loss pad One of two loss pads (either long or short) can be selected on a per trunk basis. To provide this functionality, LD 14 has to be configured with a Class of Service of either SHL (short line) or LOL (long line). The configured pad type is downloaded onto the XDID/DOD cards.
PAGE 485
Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Page 1443 of 3156 Proceed to Send message to the firmware A “Proceed to Send” message must be sent to the firmware in cases of non dial pulse trunks, as soon as the software is able to receive digits. To support this functionality, overlay 14 must be configured with DTCR = YES.
PAGE 486
Page 1444 of 3156 Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Held call clearing No software changes are required to support this functionality on the XDID/ DOD cards. Unequipped channel notification To support this functionality, a channel download message is sent to the XDID pack whenever a trunk on the pack is removed. Call blocking Before disabling a trunk, the software requires confirmation that the trunk is in the idle state.
PAGE 487
Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Page 1445 of 3156 Feature interactions DID/DOD This feature provides the same feature interactions as the following DID/ DOD features: • End of Selection, End of Selection Busy • Provision of Tones • Selectable DN Size • Partial Dial Timing • Seizure Acknowledgment • DID Restricted Class of Service • DID to TIE Connection, and • Enhanced Night Service.
PAGE 488
Page 1446 of 3156 Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Note: BARA CLS must be configured on the XDID trunk for the described process to occur.
PAGE 489
Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Page 1447 of 3156 LD 15 – In the Customer Data Block, allow DID to TIE connections: Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add, or change. TYPE: CDB NET Customer Data Block. YES DID to TIE connections are allowed. ...
PAGE 490
Page 1448 of 3156 Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe GTI 128 GTO 128 ICF 0 OGF 0 DSI 360000 NEDC ETH FEDC ETH ... MR PPM, XLD PRDL BSY EOS BSY ACKW BTT 100 LD 14 – Define an XDID card unit: Prompt Response Description REQ NEW, CHG Create a New Data Block. Change an existing Data Block. TYPE DID Direct Inward Dial trunk data block. XDID Extended (Intelligent Peripheral Equipment [IPE]) Direct Inward Dialing trunk. ... XTRK ... 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 491
Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Page 1449 of 3156 SIGL EAM Ear And Mouth (E&M) signaling (note that this prompt uses the letter “A”, instead of the “&” which is more commonly used in the abbreviation of Ear and Mouth). STRI IMM Immediate Start arrangement Incoming. STRO IMM Immediate Start arrangement Outgoing. ... CLS Class of Service. The Class of Service parameters to be downloaded onto the XDID card unit.
PAGE 492
Page 1450 of 3156 553-3001-306 Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe Standard 10.
PAGE 493
Page 1451 of 3156 Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support Contents The following are topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Supervision Central Office Trunk (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARF Supervision Central Office Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tone Supervised Central Office Trunk with downloadable Busy Tone parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 494
Page 1452 of 3156 Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support • NT5K82AA (Swiss) • NT5K90AA (Danish PPM) • NT5K90BA (Danish non-PPM) • NT5K93AA (Norwegian PPM) • NT5K93BA (Norwegian non-PPM) • NTAG03AA (Dutch COT) • NTAG04AA (Dutch DID/COT) • NT5K18BA (New Zealand) • NT5K99AA (Spanish PPM), and • NT5K99BA (Spanish non-PPM). The NT5K18AA (UK XFCOT) is not affected by the software changes introduced to support the new XFCOT packs.
PAGE 495
Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support Page 1453 of 3156 Tone Supervised Central Office Trunk with downloadable Busy Tone parameters A tone supervised COT has a busy tone detector on each unit. Busy tone is provided by the PSTN when the far end releases from outgoing and incoming trunks. The tone supervised COT is configured in LD 14 with BTS.
PAGE 496
Page 1454 of 3156 553-3001-306 Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support • Static Loss Pad Selection. Trunk pad selection controls transmission loss. A pad may be inserted within or outside an XFCOT trunk card to allow a call to terminate on a station or another trunk. Two pad types are available to support long line or short line. The pad types are configured in LD 14 on a per unit basis, against a Class of Service of SHL for short line or a Class of Service of LOL for long line.
PAGE 497
Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support Page 1455 of 3156 • Balance impedance adjustment. It is possible to download the balance and termination impedance configured by a craftsperson for a NT5K90AA (Danish PPM) or NT5K90BA (Danish non-PPM) unit. The termination impedance is defaulted to value of 600 ohms. The balance impedance may be configured in LD 14 using the BIMP prompt, as 600 ohms or 3COM (three-component). • Flash hook signaling, for features requiring a flash hook operation.
PAGE 498
Page 1456 of 3156 Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support The following table summarizes the downloaded software configurations that each XFCOT card supports. Table 44 Downloaded configurations for XFCOT cards XFCOT card Hardware I.D.
PAGE 499
Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support Page 1457 of 3156 The new XFCOT trunks cannot support the PPM frequency characteristics, configured as the PPM ID, for each trunk. The PPM ID is configured for the first trunk configured for the pack, and cannot be changed unless all trunks are removed from the pack and then reconfigured. The same restrictions apply to the busy tone indication ID. Only static pad selection is supported on the new XFCOT cards.
PAGE 500
Page 1458 of 3156 Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance for DID Answer Supervision If FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision (FC68) package 223 is configured on XFCOT units, it may lead to incorrect call status. Therefore, equipping the FCC package is not recommended.
PAGE 501
Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support Page 1459 of 3156 Dependencies: Meridian 1 XPE (XPE) package 203;PPM/Message Registration (MR) package 101; Trunk Failure Monitor (TFM) package 182; and Trunk Hook Flash (Centrex) (THF) package 157. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 14 – Configure the trunk parameters for the new XFCOT cards. LD 14 – Configure the trunk parameters for the new XFCOT cards.
PAGE 502
Page 1460 of 3156 PPID Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support (0)-15 PPM country ID. Must be configured if PPM is enabled on the route. One PPID type per card. Trunks must be removed from a card to change PPID. Choose from one of the following PPM IDs, according to country: (0) – UK (50 Hz). 1 – France (50 Hz). 2 – France (12 Hz). 3 – Germany (16 kHz). 4 – Switzerland (12 kHz). 5 – Denmark (12 kHz). 6 – Norway (16 kHz). 7 – Belgium (16 kHz). 8 – Spain (12 kHz). 9 – Portugal (12 kHz).
PAGE 503
Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support CLS SUPN Page 1461 of 3156 Class of Service options. (SHL) LOL Enter SHL for short line (LOL for long line) static loss pad selection. (XBAT) BAT Enter BAT for battery supervised COT; (XBAT) for no battery supervision. (XARF) ARF Enter ARF for ARF supervised COT; (XARF) for no ARF supervision. (XLBS) LBS Enter LBS for loop break supervised COT; (XLBS) for no loop break supervision.
PAGE 504
Page 1462 of 3156 553-3001-306 Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software Support Standard 10.
PAGE 505
Page 1463 of 3156 Extended Multifrequency Compelled Sender/Receiver Contents The following are topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 506
Page 1464 of 3156 Extended Multifrequency Compelled Sender/Receiver In support of the NT5K21AA card, the Meridian 1 software has been modified as follows: • Four DS-30X channels are provided for simultaneous generation and detection (forward and backwards) of MFC digits • Four DS-30X channels are provided for alternate generation and detection of MFE digits (software selectable) • A DS-30X channel of A10 formatted signaling is provided for communication between the Meridian 1 CPU and the NT5K21AA pac
PAGE 507
Extended Multifrequency Compelled Sender/Receiver Page 1465 of 3156 System parameters have to be downloaded on the NT5K21AA card in the following cases: • When the NT5K21AA card is enabled in LD 32 and 54 • During service changes and initialization • When a new NT5K21AA unit is defined in LD 13, and • When an NT5K21AA card is moved to another card, in LD 13.
PAGE 508
Page 1466 of 3156 Extended Multifrequency Compelled Sender/Receiver Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 97 – Download the system parameters, and define the Multifrequency Minimum Receiver Level (MFRL). 2 LD 94 – Create the MFC/MFE Signaling Level tables. 3 LD 13 – Create the MFC/MFE unit data block. 4 LD 16 – Create the route data block.
PAGE 509
Extended Multifrequency Compelled Sender/Receiver Page 1467 of 3156 LD 14 – Create the trunk data block, and define the range of Multifrequency Digit Level (MFL). Prompt Response Description (0)-15 Multifrequency digit level. Expanded from 0-7 to 0-15 for Meridian 1 Superloop only. Enter the MFC digit level required for signals to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). ... MFL Superloop codes and values: 0 = -8 dBM. 1 = -11 dBM. 2 = -12 dBM. 3 = -13 dBM. 4 = -14 dBM. 5 = -15 dBM. 6 = -16 dBM.
PAGE 510
Page 1468 of 3156 553-3001-306 Extended Multifrequency Compelled Sender/Receiver Standard 10.
PAGE 511
Page 1469 of 3156 Extended Tone Detector Global Parameters Download Contents The following are topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 512
Page 1470 of 3156 Extended Tone Detector Global Parameters Download This feature allows several new parameters and a new message to be downloaded onto the new global XTD pack, the NT5K48AA.
PAGE 513
Extended Tone Detector Global Parameters Download Page 1471 of 3156 Operating parameters The global NT5K48AA card supports the first stage dialtone detection of the NT5K20AA and the NT5K20AB cards. Although the NT5K20AA and the NT5K20AB can be used with the NT5K48AA, these UK cards do not support second-stage dialtone detection because they cannot interpret the new Detect Second Stage Dialtone message (second stage dialtone detection is not used for the UK market).
PAGE 514
Page 1472 of 3156 Extended Tone Detector Global Parameters Download LD 97 – Configure all the first and second stage dial tone detection parameters (TYPE = DTD). Prompt Response Description TYPE DTD First- and second-stage dialtone detection parameters. XTDT (0)-7 Extended Tone Detection Table. ... XDTD table number in which the parameters are stored. Table 0 can be changed but must not be removed. Table 0 always exists and is initialized to default values.
PAGE 515
Extended Tone Detector Global Parameters Download Page 1473 of 3156 LD 97 – Configure the flexible XDTR minimum accept level parameter (TYPE = DTR). Prompt Response Description TYPE DTR First- and second-stage dial tone detection parameters. MINL 3-(42)-48 Minimum accept level for Digitone Receivers in dBM, which is the absolute value of the minimum accept level. Input that is not a multiple of 3 is rounded down to a valid multiple of 3. ...
PAGE 516
Page 1474 of 3156 Extended Tone Detector Global Parameters Download Table 45 Recommended parameters according to country Country DFQ MDL MVT BRK CAD SSC MINL Denmark 1 TBD TBD 0 ms. 0 — -45 dBm Holland 0 TBD TBD TBD 0 — -30 dBm New Zealand 1 TBD TBD TBD 0 — -45 dBm LD 13 – Define the protected data block of the XTD card. Prompt Response Description (0)-7 Extended Tone Detector Table Number, prompted when TYPE = XTD. ...
PAGE 517
Page 1475 of 3156 Fast Tone Digit Switch Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 518
Page 1476 of 3156 Fast Tone Digit Switch Operating parameters Tone Digit Switch cards QPC197 and QPC251 cannot coexist with the QPC609 or NT8D17 within the same Meridian 1 system. Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging Fast Tone and Digit Switch (FTDS) package 87 has no feature package dependencies. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 17 – Change the duration of Digitone burst.
PAGE 519
Page 1477 of 3156 FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DID calls terminating at the Meridian 1 . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls forwarded to Public Switched Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DID calls forwarded to private networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477 1479 1480 1481 Feature interactions . . . . . .
PAGE 520
Page 1478 of 3156 FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision This feature is designed specifically for telephone calls coming in through Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks. Answer supervision for all other types of telephone calls is not affected. This feature works in conjunction with the following types of calls: • Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls terminating at the Meridian 1 and forwarded to a Recorded Announcement (RAN).
PAGE 521
FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision Page 1479 of 3156 • Meridian 1: For DID calls terminating at the Meridian 1, the system returns answer supervision based on the terminating condition. For DID calls forwarded to Public Switched Networks (PSN) or private networks, the system returns answer supervision based on the condition of the outgoing trunk (whether answered or timed out). • CO: The Meridian 1 provides the pseudo-answer for DID calls because the Meridian 1 cannot return answer supervision.
PAGE 522
Page 1480 of 3156 FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision DID call terminating status Answer supervision returned with FCC Compliance Not answered No Busy signal No Recorder signal No Calls forwarded to Public Switched Network Because it is uncertain whether or not the far end will return answer supervision, the Meridian 1 uses the EOD and ODT timers.
PAGE 523
FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision Page 1481 of 3156 DID calls forwarded to private networks Answer supervision is not always returned on TIE trunks because some TIE trunks leased from public carriers are connected to COs that do not support answer supervision.
PAGE 524
Page 1482 of 3156 FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision Feature Group D and Japan DID trunks Feature Group D trunks and Japan (JPN) DID trunks are not affected by this feature. ISDN trunks Both incoming and outgoing Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) trunks are affected by this feature. • For ISDN incoming DID trunks, the connect message is returned when answer supervision is returned or when the end of dial timer expires.
PAGE 525
FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision • a busy tone is received, and • a reorder tone is received. Page 1483 of 3156 Feature packaging This feature requires Federal Communications Commission Compliance for DID Answer Supervision (FC68) package 223. Feature implementation There are no specific implementation procedures for this feature. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 526
Page 1484 of 3156 553-3001-306 FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision Standard 10.
PAGE 527
Page 1485 of 3156 FCC Compliance for Equal Access Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 528
Page 1486 of 3156 FCC Compliance for Equal Access The two types of Equal Access calls that may be restricted are: • North American toll calls (1+NPA+NXX+XXXX),where NPA = Number Plan Area, NXX = any three digits with N being any digit except 0 or 1, and XXXX = any four digits, and • International toll calls (011+CC+NN),where CC = Country Code and NN = National Number. FCC compliant dialing plans. Table 47 FCC compliant dialing plans.
PAGE 529
FCC Compliance for Equal Access Page 1487 of 3156 GCR permits a configuration of allowing or denying all North American Equal Access toll calls and all international Equal Access toll calls. This GCR restriction is based on call type only, and does not take into account the dialed Carrier Identification Code. SCR uses the New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) feature to place a more selective restriction on Equal Access toll calls, based on the dialed Carrier Identification Code (CIC).
PAGE 530
Page 1488 of 3156 FCC Compliance for Equal Access This feature does not support network signaling, since the intention is to restrict Equal Access calls directly terminating at the Central Office and not at another network node. This feature does not restrict calls made by an attendant. The # sign is not outpulsed by Meridian 1 systems, as recommended in the FCC Bellcore North American Dialing Plan.
PAGE 531
FCC Compliance for Equal Access Page 1489 of 3156 LD 16 – Apply Equal Access call restriction to this route. Prompt Response Description (NO) YES Enable Equal Access Restrictions. ... EQAR Prompted when TKTP = CO, FEX, WAT, or ISA, and ICOG = OGT, or IAO. - GCR (NO) YES General Carrier Restriction to restrict Equal Access calls. - - NTOL (DENY) ALOW North American toll calls (i.e., 1+ calls). - - ITOL (DENY) ALOW International toll calls (i.e., 011+ calls).
PAGE 532
Page 1490 of 3156 FCC Compliance for Equal Access Feature operation The dialing sequence for Equal Access calls on Meridian 1 systems is: • Access Code (either trunk or NARS/BARS) • Carrier Access Code (CAC). The CAC is comprised of the Equal Access code (10) and the Carrier Identification Code (CIC) (any three digits). The CIC specifies the carrier that will handle the call, • Telephone number. The dialing sequence can contain two special characters, the asterisk (*) and the number sign (#).
PAGE 533
Page 1491 of 3156 First-second Degree Busy Indication Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 534
Page 1492 of 3156 First-second Degree Busy Indication Feature packaging This feature is packaged in International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 15 – At the OPT prompt, deny/allow Attendant Busy Display. LD 15 – At the OPT prompt, deny/allow Attendant Busy Display. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add, or change. TYPE: CDB ATT Customer Data Block. Attendant Console Options.
PAGE 535
Page 1493 of 3156 Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 536
Page 1494 of 3156 Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds When there are no more calls waiting in the attendant queue the CWL is turned off. The Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds (FACWT) feature allows the thresholds to be defined as a percentage of the active consoles, consoles which are not in Position Busy or Night Service, or as a fixed number.
PAGE 537
Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds Page 1495 of 3156 Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 15 – The Customer Data Block service change accepts the options FACD and FACA to be defined as a customer option. The range and usage of the CWCL thresholds is defined by the FAC option selected. To allow the calls waiting thresholds to be defined as percentages respond to the OPT prompt with FACA.
PAGE 538
Page 1496 of 3156 - OPT Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds (FACD) FACA Options for customer: (Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds Denied), Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds Allowed. (Denies), Allows the attendant Call Waiting thresholds to be defined as a percentage of active attendants. xxxyyy Call Waiting Lamp thresholds Where xxx defines the lower threshold and yyy defines the upper threshold. Valid ranges for number of calls when FACD is entered in response to OPT.
PAGE 539
Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds Page 1497 of 3156 CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. CPG 1-63 Console Presentation Group: ACG (Attendant Console Group) number. ... AODN ... CWCL xxxyyy (0)-255(0)-255 (0)-1000(0)-1000 Call Waiting Lamp thresholds Where xxx defines the lower threshold and yyy defines the upper threshold. Valid ranges for number of calls when FACD is set in response to OPT in LD 15. Valid ranges for percentages when FACA is set in response to OPT in LD 15.
PAGE 540
Page 1498 of 3156 Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds Table 48 Upper and lower limits of calls waiting versus number of active attendants. Number of active attendants Number of calls waiting in queue to achieve 100% lower limit Number of calls waiting in queue to achieve 200% upper limit 1 1 2 2 2 4 3 3 6 Table 49 CWL state versus number of active attendants.
PAGE 541
Page 1499 of 3156 Flexible Attendant Directory Number Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 542
Page 1500 of 3156 Flexible Attendant Directory Number Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 15 – Define or change the attendant Directory Number. LD 15 – Define or change the attendant Directory Number. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: ATT Gate opener. xxx...x Number dialed to reach the attendant (the default is 0). ...
PAGE 543
Page 1501 of 3156 Flexible Busy Tone Timer Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 544
Page 1502 of 3156 Flexible Busy Tone Timer Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 16 – Set data for Flexible busy/overflow time to implement the flexible Busy Tone Timer feature: LD 16 – Set data for Flexible busy/overflow time to implement the flexible Busy Tone Timer feature: Prompt Response Description 2-(30)-254 Enter busy/overflow time to be returned on DID routes in seconds. ...
PAGE 545
Page 1503 of 3156 Flexible Dial Tone Detection Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 546
Page 1504 of 3156 Flexible Dial Tone Detection This feature has the following three options: Dial Tone Position (DTP) With the DTP option an Outgoing Access Code (OAC) is selected. Then FDTD verifies the dialed digits against the OAC (for example, country code) of up to four digits. When DTP is set, only the OAC digits are outpulsed before the DTD is reconnected. The DTP is the position immediately after the OAC. Up to four OACs can be specified.
PAGE 547
Flexible Dial Tone Detection Page 1505 of 3156 LD 16 – Set data for Flexible busy/overflow time: Prompt Response Description DTD (NO) YES Dial Tone Detection (is not) is to be performed on this route. SCDT (NO) YES Secondary dial tone (will not) will be used on route. ... LD 56 – Create tone and ringing parameters for one or more customers: Prompt Response Description FDTD Flexible Dial Tone Detection data. ...
PAGE 548
Page 1506 of 3156 553-3001-306 Flexible Dial Tone Detection Standard 10.
PAGE 549
Page 1507 of 3156 Flexible Direct Inward Dialing Prior to the introduction of the Flexible Direct Inward Dialing (FDID) feature, hotels were required to purchase a large number of DID numbers that matched the number of hotel guest rooms. These DID DNs must be coordinated with the local exchange and become permanent in the Meridian 1 system. The FDID feature allows hotels to assign a temporary DID number to a guest room using a Property Management System (PMS) or Background Terminal (BGD).
PAGE 550
Page 1508 of 3156 553-3001-306 Flexible Direct Inward Dialing Standard 10.
PAGE 551
Page 1509 of 3156 Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 552
Page 1510 of 3156 Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering The FFCSF Flexible Feature Code must be unique and not conflict with the customer dialing plan. Secretary DNs which are programmed on a boss set cannot already be part of the customer’s DN plan, nor conflict with it. The FFCSF feature cannot be applied to sets having Multiple Appearance DNs. In a networking environment, a boss set and secretary set must be on the same node.
PAGE 553
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering Page 1511 of 3156 Call Forward and Busy Status If the secretary set is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, or a compact digital set, it can be equipped with a Call Forward and Busy Status (BFS) key/lamp pair, to perform the following: • monitor the status of the Call Forward feature on a boss set • activate/deactivate the Call Forward feature on a boss set • monitor whether or not a boss set is busy on a call, and • override the Call Forward All Call
PAGE 554
Page 1512 of 3156 Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering FFC Boss Secretarial Filtering takes precedence over enhanced Hot Type D calls. In this case, if FFC Boss Secretarial Filtering is active, calls terminate on the secretary’s set. Voice Call A call to a Voice Call key on a boss set with filtering active is not filtered to the secretary set. Feature packaging This feature is packaged under Boss Secretarial Filtering (FFCSF), package 198.
PAGE 555
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering Page 1513 of 3156 LD 57 – Define the Secretarial Filtering Access Code. Prompt Response Description xxxx Secretarial Filtering Access code. ... SFAC Feature operation The FFCSF feature may be accessed from the boss set and secretary set using the same Flexible Feature Code (FFC) followed by a control digit.
PAGE 556
Page 1514 of 3156 553-3001-306 Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering Standard 10.
PAGE 557
Page 1515 of 3156 Flexible Feature Codes Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 558
Page 1516 of 3156 Flexible Feature Codes This feature allows the use of digits 0 through 9, and the asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#) to activate features. Special Prefix (SPRE) dialing feature is still supported, with or without the FFC feature enabled. However, the Special Prefix (SPRE) must be assigned in LD 15 in order for FFCs to operate for those features that also use SPRE codes.
PAGE 559
Flexible Feature Codes Page 1517 of 3156 The confirmation Tone for FFC allows analog (500/2500 type) telephones and Meridian 1 proprietary telephones to receive a special tone when certain functions are complete.
PAGE 560
Page 1518 of 3156 Flexible Feature Codes Changes to the Station Control Passwords (SCPWs) do not take affect until after a data dump and SYSLOAD. Configuring the system or enabling the feature changes SCPL = 0 in LD 15 to any length. This change takes effect immediately. Any other change to SCPL in LD 15 requires a data dump and SYSLOAD before taking effect. When the Station Control Password Length (SCPL) is changed, all associated passwords change accordingly at the next data dump and SYSLOAD.
PAGE 561
Flexible Feature Codes Page 1519 of 3156 Call Forward All Calls When FFC is configured for a customer, #1 automatically becomes the FFC DN for both Call Forward Activate (CFWA) and Call Forward Deactivate (CFWD). When the same DN is used for both CFWA and CFWD, FFC toggles the Call Forward activated/deactivated state of the telephone. When Call Forward is activated for a telephone, entering #1 automatically deactivates Call Forward, no matter what follows #1.
PAGE 562
Page 1520 of 3156 Flexible Feature Codes Controlled Class of Service If Electronic Lock (ELK) is activated, the CCRS Class of Service is used whether Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) is active or not. ELK takes precedence over CCOS. If ELK is deactivated, the set is treated as per existing operation. When FFC ELKA and a password is entered, this set will use the CCRS Class of Service configured in LD 15.
PAGE 563
Flexible Feature Codes Page 1521 of 3156 Special Prefix Users are still able to use Special Prefix (SPRE) dialing (if the feature is enabled) with or without FFC defined. Speed Call, System With Flexible Feature Code (FFC), a confirmation tone is provided for Speed Call store after the end-of-dial (EOD) string is entered. Feature packaging Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139 requires Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) package 81 only if Electronic Lock (ELK) is desired.
PAGE 564
Page 1522 of 3156 Flexible Feature Codes LD 15 – Set parameters for Flexible Feature Code. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: CDB CCS Customer Data Block. Controlled Class of Service Options. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C.
PAGE 565
Flexible Feature Codes Page 1523 of 3156 SCPW xx...xx X Station Control Password (must be same length as SCPL in LD 15; enter X to delete password). CLS CCSA Enable CCOS for Electronic Lock (ELK) and Remote Call Forward (RCFW). LD 11 – Set Station Control Password Length for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number.
PAGE 566
Page 1524 of 3156 Flexible Feature Codes CEPT (NO) YES Conférence Européen des Postes Tel defaults are (not) allowed, to be defined (prompted only if REQ = NEW). REP* n Single-character replacement for * and # in CEPT defaults. Create defaults only. ALL (NO) YES (Do not) remove all FFCs (prompted only if REQ = OUT). CODE aaaa FFC type. ALL All prompts. No prompts. - ASRC xxxx Automatic Set Relocation code. - ATDA xxxx Autodial Activate code.
PAGE 567
Flexible Feature Codes Page 1525 of 3156 - C6DS xxxx Six-Party Conference code. - CWGA xxxx Call Waiting Activate code. - CWGD xxxx Call Waiting Deactivate code. - DEAF xxxx Deactivate Ring Again and FWD codes. - DPVS xxxx Data Port Verification code. - ELKA xxxx Electronic Lock Activate code. - ELKD xxxx Electronic Lock Deactivate code. - GRPF xxxx Group Call code. - GRCL xxxx Group Call List number. - HOLD xxxx Permanent Hold code.
PAGE 568
Page 1526 of 3156 Flexible Feature Codes - NRDY xxxx Not Ready Activate or Deactivate code for analog (500/ 2500 type) ACD telephones. - OVRD xxxx Override/Priority Override code. - PUDN xxxx Pick Up Directory Number code. - PUGR xxxx Pick Up Group code. - PURN xxxx Pick Up Ringing Number code. - RCFA xxxx Remote Call Forward Activate code. - RCFD xxxx Remote Call Forward Deactivate code. - RCFV xxxx Remote Call Forward Verify code. - RDLN xxxx Redial Last Number code.
PAGE 569
Flexible Feature Codes - SPCU xxxx Speed Call User code. - SSPU xxxx System Speed Call User code. - TFAS xxxx Trunk Answer from Any Station code. - TRMD xxxx Terminal Diagnostics code. - TRVS xxxx Trunk Verification code. - USCR xxxx User Selectable Call Redirection. - USTA xxxx User Status code. Page 1527 of 3156 Feature operation For some features, the user can dial a different FFC to activate or deactivate a feature or to verify some feature operations.
PAGE 570
Page 1528 of 3156 Flexible Feature Codes To return the telephone to the originally defined Class of Service: 1 Dial the Electronic Lock Deactivate (ELKD) code. 2 Dial the SCPW. The telephone’s Class of Service is changed to the values defined in LD 10 and LD 11.
PAGE 571
Page 1529 of 3156 Flexible Key Assignment Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 572
Page 1530 of 3156 Flexible Key Assignment Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 11 – Assign key functions to keys. LD 11 – Assign key functions to keys. Prompt Response Description xx aaa Key number (0-9) and key function. ... KEY Feature operation Press the appropriate key on the SL-1 telephone to activate the feature assigned to it. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 573
Page 1531 of 3156 Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 574
Page 1532 of 3156 Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 15 – Enter an even value between 0-30 seconds, at the FOPT prompt to define the Orbit Prevention Timer. LD 15 – Enter an even value between 0-30 seconds, at the FOPT prompt to define the Orbit Prevention Timer.
PAGE 575
Page 1533 of 3156 Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 576
Page 1534 of 3156 Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control • busy tone • call forward dial tone • call forward message-waiting dial tone • camp-on confirm tone • control dial tone • dial tone • dial-0 recall tone • hold confirmation tone • listed DN tone • message waiting dial tone • overflow tone • preemption tone • ringback tone • test tone These tones are also service changeable in LD 56.
PAGE 577
Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control • off-hook queuing tone • set relocate tone • telset messaging alert tone • telset messaging OK tone • telset status update tone Page 1535 of 3156 Three exceptions to the categories of tones described so far are special dial tone, expensive route warning tone, and precedence call waiting tone. These tones are flexible only in their sound and not in their cadence.
PAGE 578
Page 1536 of 3156 Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 17 – Modify the system hardware and software parameters: 2 LD 56 – Modify or change customer's tone and ringing parameters: LD 17 – Modify the system hardware and software parameters: Prompt Response Description PARM (NO) YES Change system parameters. ABCD (NO) YES 16-Button DTMF operation is (is not) enabled.
PAGE 579
Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control Page 1537 of 3156 LD 56 – Modify or change customer's tone and ringing parameters: Prompt Response Description FTC Flexible tone and ringing. ... TYPE Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 580
Page 1538 of 3156 553-3001-306 Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control Standard 10.
PAGE 581
Page 1539 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality of Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections without Trunk Barring configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality of Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections for Supervised Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 582
Page 1540 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections • denies trunk to trunk connections for Transfer and Conference • allows trunk to trunk connections for Supervised Conference only, and denies trunk to trunk connections for Transfer and unsupervised Conference The Conference feature allows additional parties to join an established call. One internal Directory Number must always be involved in the Conference call for a Supervised Conference.
PAGE 583
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1541 of 3156 • When CLS = FTTR, Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Restricted (FTTR), trunk to trunk connections are denied for both Conference and Transfer. • When CLS = FTTC, Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional, trunk to trunk connections are allowed for Supervised Conference. Trunk to trunk connections are denied for Transfer and unsupervised Conference. Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional (FTTC) is the default for new sets.
PAGE 584
Page 1542 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Figure 42 Functionality of Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections without Trunk Barring configured Meridian 1 Incoming Trunk Route A Outgoing Trunk Route C Telephone B 553-9468 When Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Options is set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Only (FTLY) and the Class of Service of Set B is set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Restricted (FTTR), the following is true: • Telephone B cannot transfer Incoming Trunk Ro
PAGE 585
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1543 of 3156 Referring to Figure 42, when Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Options is set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Only (FTLY) and the Class of Service of Set B is set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional (FTTC), the following is true: • Telephone B cannot complete the Call Transfer from Trunk Route A to Trunk Route C.
PAGE 586
Page 1544 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Functionality of Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections for Supervised Conference For Supervised Conference, at least one internal set must be involved in the conference. With the Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections feature configured, if the last set that drops out of the conference has Class of Service set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Restricted (FTTR) or Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional (FTTC), the call is disconnected.
PAGE 587
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1545 of 3156 Referring to Figure 43, Telephones A, B, and C have Class of Service set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Unrestricted (FTTU), Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Restricted (FTTR), and Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional (FTTC) respectively. Telephones A, B, and C and Trunk Routes 1 and 2 are involved in a conference.
PAGE 588
Page 1546 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections • When FTOP = TBFT, Trunk Barring Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections, additional restrictions are applied, depending upon the set’s Class of Service. Trunk to trunk connections barred by TBAR always remain restricted. Connections not barred by TBAR utilize the set’s Class of Service.
PAGE 589
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1547 of 3156 Figure 44 Functionality of Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections with Trunk Barring configured and FTOP = TBFT Meridian 1 Trunk Trunk Route1 Route1 Trunk Route 3 (Barred by TBAR) Trunk Route 2 Trunk Route 4 (Barred by TBAR) Telephone B 553-9470 • B can conference Trunk Routes 1 and 2 and then disconnect. In this case, Trunk Routes 1 and 2 remain connected, as TBAR does not bar the connection between the two trunks.
PAGE 590
Page 1548 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Referring to Figure 44, when Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Options is set to Trunk Barring Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections (TBFT) and the Class of Service of Set B is set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional (FTTC), the following is true: 553-3001-306 • B cannot complete the Call Transfer from Trunk Route 1 to Trunk Route 2 • B can complete the Supervised Conference with Trunk Routes 1 and 2.
PAGE 591
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1549 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Options (FTOP) = Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Trunk Barring (FTTB) Figure 45 illustrates Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections functionality with Trunk Barring configured and FTOP set to FTTB.
PAGE 592
Page 1550 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Referring to Figure 45, when the Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Options is set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Trunk Barring (FTTB) and the Class of Service of B is set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Unrestricted (FTTU), all TBAR restrictions for Transfer and Conference are lifted. On a TBAR unrestricted trunk, B receives a call on incoming Trunk Route 1. The call is established.
PAGE 593
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1551 of 3156 When TBAR does not restrict connection from Trunk Route 1 to any other trunk route: • B can transfer the call on Trunk Route 1 to any of the Trunk Routes 2, 3, or 4. • B can conference the call on Trunk Route 1 with any of the Trunk Routes 2, 3, or 4. On a TBAR restricted trunk, B receives a call on incoming Trunk Route 3. The call is established. B initiates a call with any of the Trunk Routes 1, 2, or 4.
PAGE 594
Page 1552 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections On a TBAR restricted trunk, B receives a call on incoming Trunk Route 3. The call is established. B initiates a call with any of the Trunk Routes 1, 2, or 4. When TBAR restricts connection from Trunk Route 3 to any other trunk routes: • B cannot transfer the call on Trunk Route 3 to any of the Trunk Routes 1, 2, or 4. However, as B has Class of Service set to FTTC, the TBAR restriction is lifted for Supervised Conference.
PAGE 595
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1553 of 3156 When Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Options is set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Only (FTLY) and the Class of Service is set to Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional (FTTC), trunk to trunk connections are allowed for Supervised Conference only. Trunk to trunk connections for Transfer and unsupervised Conference are denied, irrespective of whether or not TBAR is activated.
PAGE 596
Page 1554 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Table 51 CLS and FTOP Matrix for Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections with TBAR configured Station Classes of Service (LDs 10 and 11) Customer Level Options (LD 15) FTOP = FRES (Default) FTOP = TBFT FTOP = FTTB FTOP = FTLY CLS = FTTU (Default for existing sets) Existing TBAR functionality. Existing TBAR functionality. Lifts all TBAR restrictions for Transfer and Conference.
PAGE 597
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1555 of 3156 Operating parameters Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections is configured at a set level, by defining the Class of Service (CLS) prompt in Overlays 10 or 11. All existing telephone sets default to a Class of Service of Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Unrestricted (FTTU) upon initial software conversion. When new telephone sets are added and configured, they default to a Class of Service of Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional (FTTC).
PAGE 598
Page 1556 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections As per the existing operation, answer and disconnect supervision is a requirement for Transfer and Conference. Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections does not support Basic Rate Interface (BRI) telephone sets or Attendant Console operations. Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections supports Analog and ISDN trunks. R2MFC and AC15 signaling is also supported.
PAGE 599
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1557 of 3156 Feature interactions Access Restrictions Access Restrictions limits terminal access to the exchange network, private network, and certain features and services.
PAGE 600
Page 1558 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conference If the Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections feature allows a telephone set to conference to an outgoing trunk, then Conference is allowed unless it is blocked by other existing restrictions. If a telephone set disconnects from a conference, Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections restrictions verify whether the telephone set is allowed to transfer the call between the two trunks.
PAGE 601
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1559 of 3156 Meridian Mail Trunk Access Restriction Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections limitations do not apply to Meridian Mail Trunk Access Restriction (MTAR). Irrespective of the Station’s Class of Service, external calls are prevented from being transferred/conferenced to Meridian Mail. Multi-Party Operations - Call Join The functionality of Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections applies to conferences made by the Call Join operation.
PAGE 602
Page 1560 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Virtual Network Services Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections does not apply any restrictions to existing Virtual Network Services (VNS) functionality. Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 15 – Configure Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections options.
PAGE 603
Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Page 1561 of 3156 LD 10 – Configure Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections for analog (500/2500 type) sets. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change existing data. TYPE: 500 500/2500 type telephone set data block. TN lscu cu Terminal number. For Option 11C. (FTTC) FTTU Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional (default for new sets). Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Unrestricted (default). FTTR Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Restricted. ...
PAGE 604
Page 1562 of 3156 Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 605
Page 1563 of 3156 Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1564 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 606
Page 1564 of 3156 Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number Dynamic voice/data Terminal Numbers (TNs) have two Directory Numbers (DNs) to place and receive calls. The primary voice DN is assigned to key 00 on the telephone. Another key is assigned to the data DN. This key is designated as the data mode key. All data calls are placed and received via this key. Any other secondary DN keys assigned to a dynamic voice/data TN can place and receive voice calls only.
PAGE 607
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number Page 1565 of 3156 If set relocation takes place, upper and lower TNs of a Time Compression Multiplexing (TCM) loop are relocated together. This occurs even if upper and lower TNs were assigned as dynamic or static. A relocated lower TN (015) must be in voice mode. Following relocation, both TNs maintain their prior voice or data settings. When a service change is performed on a dynamic TN in data mode, it is automatically changed to voice mode.
PAGE 608
Page 1566 of 3156 Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number Voice Call If a dynamic TN has a single appearance DN key that terminates on a Voice Call (VCC) key, the called party hears a single beep if occupied on another DN. However, if the called party is a dynamic TN in data mode, the DN key lamp flashes. A beep is not provided. Feature packaging The Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number feature is contained in M2000 Digital Sets (DSET) package 88.
PAGE 609
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number Page 1567 of 3156 LD 11 – Assign the Static Data Terminal Number. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG New, or Change. TYPE: xxxx Telephone type, where xxxx = 2006, 2008, 2016, 2216 or 2616. TN lscu cu Terminal Number where u = 0 - 31. For Option 11C. CLS FLXA DTA Flexible voice/data allowed. FLXA is only required if data TN unit is greater than 15. (FLXD) = Flexible voice/data denied.
PAGE 610
Page 1568 of 3156 Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number CLS FLXA VCE Flexible voice/data allowed. (FLXD) = Flexible voice/data denied. This Class of Service can only be assigned to 2006, 2008, 2016, 2216 or 2616 sets. When configured to CLS = FLXA Voice Class of Service (VCE) can be assigned to the upper TN unit (16 - 31) and Data Class of Service (DTA) can be assigned to the lower TN unit (0 -15). A Single Call Ringing (SCR) key can be designated a Data Mode (DTMK) key.
PAGE 611
Page 1569 of 3156 Forced Camp-On and Priority Override Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 612
Page 1570 of 3156 Forced Camp-On and Priority Override All stations involved in an established call being broken into must have Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) Class of Service.
PAGE 613
Forced Camp-On and Priority Override Page 1571 of 3156 Feature packaging Priority Override/Forced Camp-On (POVR) is packaged under package 186. Dependencies: • Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139 • Multi-party Operations (MPO) package 141 Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 10, LD 11 – Respond to CLS prompt with CPFA to allow Camp-On to another set, or CPFD to deny such Camp-On.
PAGE 614
Page 1572 of 3156 Forced Camp-On and Priority Override LD 10, LD 11 – Respond to CLS prompt with CPFA to allow Camp-On to another set, or CPFD to deny such Camp-On. Respond to PLEV prompt with a value between 1 and 7, to set the priority level for this set. Prompt Response Description CLS (CPFA) CPTD Forced Camp-On from another set (allowed) denied. PLEV 0-(2)-7 Priority Level, prompted with Priority Override/Forced Camp-On (POVR) package 186.
PAGE 615
Forced Camp-On and Priority Override Page 1573 of 3156 LD 15 – To select either automatic or manual forced Camp-On for a customer, respond to the AFCO prompt with either YES (automatic) or NO (manual). Prompt Response Description (NO) YES (Manual) Automatic Forced Camp-On, prompted with Priority Override/Forced Camp-On (POVR) package 186. ... AFCO LD 16 – At the PLEV prompt, specify priority levels for trunk routes.
PAGE 616
Page 1574 of 3156 Forced Camp-On and Priority Override Feature operation Forced Camp-On is activated automatically (if Automatic Forced Camp-On is defined), or it can be activated manually using the Enhanced Override (EOVR) key on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones or the Enhanced Override Flexible Feature Code on analog (500/2500 type) telephones. If the EOVR key is pressed again or the Enhanced Override Flexible Feature Code dialed again, Priority Override is activated.
PAGE 617
Page 1575 of 3156 Forward No Answer Call Waiting Direct Inward Dialing Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 618
Page 1576 of 3156 Forward No Answer Call Waiting Direct Inward Dialing Feature interactions Call Waiting Redirection With the Call Waiting Redirection feature also enabled, the Call Waiting Redirection feature takes precedence over the FCWD feature. The existing CFNA also takes precedence over the existing Attendant Recall of Call Waiting calls.
PAGE 619
Forward No Answer Call Waiting Direct Inward Dialing Page 1577 of 3156 Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 620
Page 1578 of 3156 553-3001-306 Forward No Answer Call Waiting Direct Inward Dialing Standard 10.
PAGE 621
Page 1579 of 3156 Generic XFCOT Software Support Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1579 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 622
Page 1580 of 3156 Generic XFCOT Software Support With this feature, a disconnect-supervised loopstart Central Office trunk follows normal XFCOT rules for trunk-to-trunk connection and disconnection. Functionality is provided on the following IPE circuit cards: • NTCK16AD for PPM/BAT/BTS • NTCK16BD for BAT/BTS Operating parameters There are no operating parameters associated with this feature.
PAGE 623
Generic XFCOT Software Support Page 1581 of 3156 Caller disconnection during park state is detected by a disconnect supervised loopstart trunk on an XFCOT card. The disconnected caller is then dropped from the parked DN. Camp-On The Camp-On feature allows an attendant to route one additional call to a busy DN so it can be rung when it becomes free. If the busy DN is not free after a customer-defined time, the call is recalled to the attendant.
PAGE 624
Page 1582 of 3156 Generic XFCOT Software Support European XFCOT Software Support This feature supports international IPE trunks with new functionalities such as supervision on loopstart trunk, PPM, and static pad switching. The Generic XFCOT Software Support is a product improvement of this feature regarding the pad switching, the trunk-to-trunk disconnection, and the use of disconnect supervision for loopstart trunk in some features.
PAGE 625
Generic XFCOT Software Support Page 1583 of 3156 Feature packaging This feature is packaged under the following packages: • Meridian 1 XPE (XPE) package 203 • International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 • M1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS (XCT0) package 204 • M1 Superloop Administration (XCT1) package 205 (unrestricted when the XPE package is equipped) Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 97 – Choose the North America
PAGE 626
Page 1584 of 3156 Generic XFCOT Software Support LD 14 – This prompt is used to define a disconnect supervised loopstart trunk on an XFCOT. The Periodic Pulse Metering parameters on a per country basis are defined in this overlay in response to the PPID prompt. Busy tone is provided by the PSTN when the far end releases from outgoing and incoming trunks.
PAGE 627
Generic XFCOT Software Support Page 1585 of 3156 BTID xx Enter the country busy tone ID as follows: 0-2 – Reserved for future use 3 – Germany, Ireland 4 – Switzerland 5 – Denmark 6 – Norway, Kuwait, Chile, Venezuela, Indonesia, Thailand, Korea 7 – Holland 8 – Australia, Mexico 9 – Ireland 10 – Taiwan, Brazil, Tortola, Mexico 11 – Singapore 12 – Argentina, Italy 13 – Lebanon, Italy 14 – Turkey 15 – Reserved for future use.
PAGE 628
Page 1586 of 3156 553-3001-306 Generic XFCOT Software Support Standard 10.
PAGE 629
Page 1587 of 3156 Group Call Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591 Feature implementation . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 630
Page 1588 of 3156 Group Call Each Multiple Appearance, MCR/MCN DN reduces the number of telephone sets that can be added to a Group Call. For example, if two telephones have the same MCR appearance of a DN, the number of telephones in the Group Call becomes 19. That is, each appearance of a DN counts as one member, up to a maximum of 20, of the Group Call. Note: Multiple Appearance, SCR/SCN DNs count as one member of a Group Call, irrespective of its number of DN appearances.
PAGE 631
Group Call Page 1589 of 3156 Operating parameters A Group Call can be originated only from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone with a Group Call key. Group Call does not support data calls. With the Extended Conference TDS (XCT) card (NT8D17) audio interference can occur if many of the call participants are on “older-style” mechanical analog (500/2500-type) sets. This problem does not occur when participants are on Meridian Digital Telephones or “newer-style” electronic analog (500/2500-type) sets.
PAGE 632
Page 1590 of 3156 Group Call Call Pickup This feature can be used to answer a Group Call if it is activated by a valid telephone in the same Call Pickup group, or by using Directory Number (DN) Pickup or Group Pickup. Call Pickup Network Wide The Group Call feature does not allow a remote party in a Group Call list. Therefore, a Group Call cannot be picked up by a remote station. If during the network scanning a Group Call is found, it will be ignored and the network scanning will continue.
PAGE 633
Group Call Page 1591 of 3156 Make Set Busy Individual Do Not Disturb A Group Call to a telephone in Make Set Busy or Individual Do Not Disturb mode cannot be completed. The telephone will not be rung and is not counted as part of the Group Call (for instance, if all other members in the group have answered, the lamp next to the Group Call key on the originator’s telephone lights steadily).
PAGE 634
Page 1592 of 3156 Group Call Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 18 – Add or change a Group Call list. 2 LD 11 – Add or change Group Call for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. 3 LD 20 – Print Group Call data. LD 18 – Add or change a Group Call list. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE GRP Group Call data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number, as defined in LD 15. For Option 11C.
PAGE 635
Group Call TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. KEY xx GRC yy Add a Group Call key, where: Page 1593 of 3156 xx = key number, and yy = Group Call list number (0-63). LD 20 – Print Group Call data. Prompt Response Description REQ PRT Print. TYPE GRP Group Call data. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number, as defined in LD 15. For Option 11C. GRNO 0-63 Number of the Group Call group. Print data for all Group Call groups. Feature operation To make a Group Call: • Press Group Call.
PAGE 636
Page 1594 of 3156 553-3001-306 Group Call Standard 10.
PAGE 637
Page 1595 of 3156 Group Hunt Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot DN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Termination conditions . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hunting Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group Hunt Lists . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 638
Page 1596 of 3156 Group Hunt • prevent group hunt termination on any idle member via a Group Hunt Deactivate Flexible Feature Code (FFC) or via a GHD (Group Hunt Deactivate) key • limit the hunting steps to the total number of DNs in the list • initiate hunting by dialing or accessing a group hunt Pilot DN directly, and • configure a DN to be a member of more than one hunt group. Pilot DN Pilot DNs are defined as PLDN Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) in LD 57.
PAGE 639
Group Hunt Page 1597 of 3156 If condition 1 or 2 is met, then incoming calls are completed to that DN. Due to the fact that all DNs listed in condition 2 are associated with a queue the following should be kept in mind when configuring group hunt lists: • These DNs always appear idle to a hunt cycle, regardless of their actual status. The hunt always redirects to the indicated destination, and never comes back into the group hunt list, therefore these calls are never queued against the Pilot DN.
PAGE 640
Page 1598 of 3156 Group Hunt • If an access code is used as a group hunt member it must be entered as “access code and complete destination number” to ensure proper routing to the destination, not just the access code alone. • Trunk optimization does not apply. If termination condition 5 is met, the search ends for the current list and begins for the list associated with the new Pilot DN. A Pilot DN may not be a member of its own Hunting Group.
PAGE 641
Group Hunt Page 1599 of 3156 Only one hunting type is allowed per group hunt list. Linear: Hunting starts at the first DN in the list and ends when one of the conditions mentioned in “Termination conditions” on page 1596 is met. Round Robin: Hunting starts at the DN next in the list to the last DN that was hunted to. Hunting ends when one of the conditions mentioned in “Termination conditions” on page 1596 is met.
PAGE 642
Page 1600 of 3156 Group Hunt Queuing If all members of a group hunt list are busy, calls are queued against the Pilot DN of that group hunt list. Ring back tone is provided. There are a number of options available to control the number of calls allowed to be queued against any given Pilot DN. These options are: • Group Hunt Queuing Limitation allows the system administrator to select, via service change, the number of calls allowed to queue against the Pilot DN.
PAGE 643
Group Hunt Page 1601 of 3156 To activate Group Hunting again for a specific hunt group, the station user dials the GHTA (Group Hunt Termination Allowed) FFC followed by the group hunt Pilot DN associated with that group and then goes on-hook. Overflow tone is returned if the operation is not successful. To activate Group Hunting again for all groups, the station user dials the GHTA FFC and then goes on-hook.
PAGE 644
Page 1602 of 3156 Group Hunt Hunting is limited to the following: • the total number of DNs in the group • a maximum of 30 hunting groups for each hunting sequence (for multigroup systems) • a maximum of 18 hunting groups for each hunting sequence (for all other systems) Hunting may be limited to the total number of DNs in the group, or to a maximum of 30 (for multi-group systems) or 18 (for all other systems) hunting groups per hunting sequence.
PAGE 645
Group Hunt Page 1603 of 3156 Feature interactions Access Restrictions If a routing-associated DN is programmed in a group hunt list, the access restrictions based on the Class of Service and/or TGAR of the calling station/ route apply. Attendant Alternative Answering A Pilot DN can be defined as an alternative DN. Calls forwarded to a Pilot DN as an alternative DN are directed to the next DN in the group.
PAGE 646
Page 1604 of 3156 Group Hunt If the DN attempted for termination has FBA (Forward Busy Allowed) Class of Service, and if it is busy, then Group Hunting continues with the next DN in the group. Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code Primary Line Directory Numbers (PLDNs) are not overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature. Any attempt will be ignored and access denied treatment will result.
PAGE 647
Group Hunt Page 1605 of 3156 Call Transfer Any call may be transferred to a Group Hunt Pilot DN. If there are no idle sets available for the call transfer, the call is queued to the Pilot DN and the caller receives ring back tone. If the call cannot be queued because the queue threshold has been reached, the caller receives busy tone. Call Waiting Call Waiting to a Pilot DN will not be supported. Camp-on Camping an incoming call on to a Pilot DN is not be supported.
PAGE 648
Page 1606 of 3156 Group Hunt Electronic Switched Network Group Hunting can be applied to Network calls. An Electronic Switched Network (ESN) access code (trunk steering code), if encountered during Group Hunting, will terminate the hunting sequence. Hunting Group Hunting has priority over Hunting. If the DN attempted for termination by Group Hunting has HTA COS, and if it is busy, Group Hunting continues with the next DN in the group instead of following the DN’s hunting configuration.
PAGE 649
Group Hunt Page 1607 of 3156 If a MADN multiple call arrangement must be used, a supervisor set must be assigned to the hunt group. This supervisor set must be given the one and only prime appearance of the MADN. Any other appearance must have the MADN programmed as a secondary DN (any DN key other than 0). In this way, the supervisor set controls the status of the MADN and thus the group hunt treatment. If the supervisor set is busy, the hunt does not terminate on the MADN.
PAGE 650
Page 1608 of 3156 Group Hunt Recall to Same Attendant Calls redirected from a group hunt list via the listed DN or flexible attendant DN, and transferred back to the Pilot DN, are recalled if the Slow Answer Recall Timer expires. However, in practical configurations, the hunt terminates on the entry with the listed DN or attendant DN before the Slow Answer Recall Timer expires; consequently, the call is not redirected to that DN and presented on the applicable ICI key on the console.
PAGE 651
Group Hunt Page 1609 of 3156 16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Operation Group Hunt Pilot DN (GRHP) function will not be supported. Group Hunting and Speed Call DN Access can be accessed via the Autodial function. Feature packaging For markets other than France: Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL (PLDN) package 120. Dependencies: • International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 • Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139, and • System Speed Call (SSC) package 34.
PAGE 652
Page 1610 of 3156 Group Hunt Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 10 – Allow a group hunt Pilot DN (PLDN) to be entered in response to the following prompts. The overlay is also modified to disallow the removal of a DN which is part of a group hunt list. This ensures that the DN is removed from all group hunt lists prior to being removed from a set.
PAGE 653
Group Hunt Page 1611 of 3156 LD 10 – Allow a group hunt Pilot DN (PLDN) to be entered in response to the following prompts. The overlay is also modified to disallow the removal of a DN which is part of a group hunt list. This ensures that the DN is removed from all group hunt lists prior to being removed from a set. Prompt Response REQ: ... Description ... IAPG ... HUNT x...x Hunt DN may be defined as a PLDN. ... AACD ... FTR Feature EFD x...
PAGE 654
Page 1612 of 3156 Group Hunt LD 11 – Allow a new Group Hunting Denied (GHD) key to be assigned and to allow a group hunt PLDN to be entered in response to the following prompts. The overlay is also modified to disallow the removal of the last appearance of a Single Call Non-ringing (SCN), Single Call Ringing (SCR), Multiple Call Non-ringing (MCN), or Multiple Call Ringing (MCR) DN which is part of a group hunt list.
PAGE 655
Group Hunt Page 1613 of 3156 LD 12 – Allow a group hunt PLDN to be entered in response to the following prompt. Prompt Response REQ ... Description ... ICP ... AADN x...x Alternate Answering DN may be defined as a PLDN. LD 14 – Allow a group hunt PLDN to be entered in response to the following prompts. Prompt Response REQ ... Description ... NGRP ... NITE x...x Night service DN may be defined as a PLDN. ATDN x...x Auto-terminate DN may be defined as a PLDN. MNDN x...
PAGE 656
Page 1614 of 3156 Group Hunt LD 15 – Allow a group hunt Pilot DN (PLDN) to be entered in response to the following prompts. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add, or change. TYPE: CDB NIT Customer Data Block. Night Service Options. NITE x...x Night service DN may be defined as a PLDN. - NIT1 x...x First Night service by time of day DN may be defined as a PLDN. - TIM1 ... - NIT2 x...x - TIM2 ... - NIT3 x...x - TIM3 ... - NIT4 x...x - TIM4 ... ...
PAGE 657
Group Hunt Page 1615 of 3156 LD 18 – Allow a the creation of group hunt lists. Response are required to the following prompts when a group hunt list is modified, created, or removed. This overlay disallows the removal of a group hunt list if it is still associated with a PLDN that exists in LD 57. This ensures that the PLDN is removed prior to removing the group hunt list. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG MOV NEW OUT Requested operation: Modify, move, create, or remove a data block.
PAGE 658
Page 1616 of 3156 Group Hunt WRT (YES) NO Write (write information to data store). STOR x...x y...y Store: Enter entry (member) number (x...x) and Group Hunt target DN (y...y). x...x is any number in the range 0 to the value entered in response to the SIZE prompted minus one (i.e., 0-(SIZE1)). y...y is the target DN, the length of which must be less than or equal to the value entered in response to the DNSZ prompt (i.e., length of y...y ≤ DNSZ).
PAGE 659
Group Hunt Page 1617 of 3156 LD 22 – Print “PLDN” when Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL (PLDN) package 120 is equipped and a package print is requested. Prompt Response Description REQ PRT Requested operation: print information. TYPE PKG Type of information to print: equipped packages. LD 57 – Define, change, or print data associated with FFC. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG NEW Request: Modify or create data block. TYPE FFC Type: Flexible Feature Codes data block.
PAGE 660
Page 1618 of 3156 Group Hunt MQUE Maximum Queue (maximum number of calls allowed to queue against the Pilot DN.): 0 Enter 0 to deny all calls from queuing 1 Enter 1 to allow only one no call to queue (ALL) Enter ALL, the default, to allow all calls to queue (i.e., there is no limit as to the number of calls allowed to queue), or ACTM Enter ACTM to limit the number of calls allowed to queue to be less than or equal to the number of active members of the group hunt list.
PAGE 661
Group Hunt Page 1619 of 3156 Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 662
Page 1620 of 3156 553-3001-306 Group Hunt Standard 10.
PAGE 663
Page 1621 of 3156 Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 664
Page 1622 of 3156 Group Hunting Queuing Limitation The following are examples of the treatment calls receive with MQUE set to the various settings: MQUE set to 0 1 Pilot DN Z can hunt two sets, A and B. Both of these sets are busy. 2 Set (or DID trunk) C dials Pilot DN Z. 3 If C is a set it receives busy tone and cannot be queued, but if it is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk it receives whatever busy treatment has been requested for that DID route.
PAGE 665
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Page 1623 of 3156 Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 57 – The MQUE prompt accepts a limit for the number of calls allowed to be queued against a Pilot DN. When printing the Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) data block, the value against the MQUE prompt is displayed. LD 57 – The MQUE prompt accepts a limit for the number of calls allowed to be queued against a Pilot DN.
PAGE 666
Page 1624 of 3156 Group Hunting Queuing Limitation - - MQUE Maximum Queue – Maximum number of calls that may be queued against a Group Hunt Pilot DN. All calls may be queued (default). No calls can be queued. One call may be queued. Use default setting if this is a new Pilot DN, leave existing setting as is if the Pilot DN is being modified. (ALL) 0 1 ... Printing the FFC data block will include the MQUE prompt and its response.
PAGE 667
Page 1625 of 3156 Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 668
Page 1626 of 3156 Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement Operating parameters Although Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) DNs, Integrated Voice Messaging Service (VMS) DNs, Listed Directory Numbers (LDNs), Route access codes, Electronic Switched Network (ESN) access codes, and other Pilot DNs can be defined as a group hunt list member, it is recommended that they are not used due to the fact that these targets are considered as active when computing the threshold, regardless of their actual state.
PAGE 669
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement Page 1627 of 3156 LD 57 – For the Group Hunt Queuing Limitation Enhancement, responses to the following prompts are required: Prompt Response Description REQ CHG NEW Modify or create data block. TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number, as defined in LD 15. For Option 11C. FFCT Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone. CODE PLDN Pilot DN. PLDN xxxx Enter Pilot DN to be modified or created.
PAGE 670
Page 1628 of 3156 Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement Feature operation A group hunt list member is active if any call to the PLDN can terminate on the member set when it is idled. Conversely, a group hunt list member is not active if Group Hunt Termination Denied (GHTD) Flexible Feature Code (FFC) is dialed, and, or, Call Forward All Calls is active for the member and Call Forward Ignore (CFWI) in LD 57 is NO for the PLDN.
PAGE 671
Page 1629 of 3156 Handset Volume Reset Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 672
Page 1630 of 3156 Handset Volume Reset Feature description This feature is supported by the A44 chip in Meridian digital sets and causes a telephone’s handset volume to be reset to a specified volume every time that the telephone user hangs up or uses handsfree. If the user wishes to adjust the volume, the user must manually do so for each call. Operating parameters There are no operating parameters associated with this feature.
PAGE 673
Handset Volume Reset Page 1631 of 3156 Feature operation When a transmission download occurs, following a SYSLOAD or when the set line cord is plugged in, the option setting defined in LD 17 is included in the message. The message is interpreted by the set firmware and the appropriate setting is applied. A system initialization will not download this message.
PAGE 674
Page 1632 of 3156 553-3001-306 Handset Volume Reset Standard 10.
PAGE 675
Page 1633 of 3156 Handsfree Transmission Parameter Download Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 676
Page 1634 of 3156 Handsfree Transmission Parameter Download Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 system software. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 11 – Modify the system hardware and software parameters. 2 LD 17 – Create or modify the digital telephone data blocks. 3 LD 22 – Print Handsfree transmission parameter download settings. LD 11 – Modify the system hardware and software parameters.
PAGE 677
Handsfree Transmission Parameter Download Page 1635 of 3156 LD 17 – Create or modify the digital telephone data blocks. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE CFN ATRN Configuration Record. Aries Transmission. ATRN YES Meridian Modular telephone transmission parameters. Only prompted if response to TYPE is CFN. - HRLR (0)-8 32-40 Handsfree receive objective loudness rating. - HTLR (0)-11 32-54 Handsfree transmit objective loudness rating.
PAGE 678
Page 1636 of 3156 Input value Handsfree Transmission Parameter Download HRLR (dB) HTLR (dB) Input value HRLR (dB) HTLR (dB) 5 +46.25 -42.00 26 N.A. N.A. 6 +47.10 -42.00 27 N.A. N.A. 7 +47.95 -41.50 28 N.A. N.A. 8 +48.80 -41.00 29 N.A. N.A. 9 N.A. -40.50 30 N.A. N.A. 10 N.A. -40.50 31 N.A. N.A. 11 N.A. -40.00 32 +42.00 -44.00 12 N.A. N.A. 33 +41.15 -44.50 13 N.A. N.A. 34 +40.30 -45.00 14 N.A. N.A. 35 +39.45 -45.00 15 N.A. N.A. 36 +38.
PAGE 679
Handsfree Transmission Parameter Download Input value HRLR (dB) HTLR (dB) Input value Page 1637 of 3156 HRLR (dB) HTLR (dB) 47 N.A. -49.50 58 N.A. N.A. 48 N.A. -50.00 59 N.A. N.A. 49 N.A. -50.50 60 N.A. N.A. 50 N.A. -51.00 61 N.A. N.A. 51 N.A. -51.00 62 N.A. N.A. 52 N.A. -51.50 63 N.A. N.A. Note: All values are Objective Loudness Ratings (OLR) measured without inserted loss or gain for trunk card interfaces and computed per IEEE methods.
PAGE 680
Page 1638 of 3156 553-3001-306 Handsfree Transmission Parameter Download Standard 10.
PAGE 681
Page 1639 of 3156 Held Call Clearing Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 682
Page 1640 of 3156 Held Call Clearing Where several DNs appear on the same set, an on-hook or Release key action does not affect any unanswered incoming calls which are unanswered call waiting calls or are in a ringing state, whether or not the ringing tone is audible. Answered call waiting calls (those which are active or being held) are cleared by an on-hook action. A Release key action clears only active callwaiting calls.
PAGE 683
Held Call Clearing Page 1641 of 3156 Conference Active Conference calls are cleared by an on-hook or Release key action. Conference calls being held are cleared by an on-hook action only, and not by a Release key action. In either case, all other parties on the conference remain connected. Handsfree For a set equipped with a Handsfree add-on unit, the on-hook action is suppressed if the Handsfree key is pressed simultaneous to the on-hook.
PAGE 684
Page 1642 of 3156 Held Call Clearing LD 15 – Activate Held Call Clearing in response to the HCC prompt to implement this feature. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add, or change. TYPE: CDB FTR Customer Data Block. Gate opener. (NO) YES XFER Held Call Clearing is to be activated, (deactivated) or set to transfer the held call. ... - HCC Feature operation Place the handset of your Meridian 1 proprietary telephone on-hook to release both the active and held call.
PAGE 685
Page 1643 of 3156 History File The History File provides the capability to allocate an area of protected data to store system messages until a printout is requested by a technician. The size of the History File is defined on a system basis and can be up to 65,534 characters. Since one word of protected data stores two History File characters, the size of the History File is up to 32,767 words of protected data.
PAGE 686
Page 1644 of 3156 553-3001-306 History File Standard 10.
PAGE 687
Page 1645 of 3156 Hong Kong Digital Trunk Interface Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 688
Page 1646 of 3156 Hong Kong Digital Trunk Interface This feature also meets the requirement of requiring the Meridian 1, after a trunk seizure, to wait 600 milliseconds before accepting the dialed digits from the far end. This 600 milliseconds dialing delay is provided by the Dial Delay Timer, whose maximum configurable delay has been extended to 1,023 milliseconds. The timer is set on a per-route basis. Operating parameters Hong Kong Digital Trunk Interface modification applies only to 1.
PAGE 689
Hong Kong Digital Trunk Interface Page 1647 of 3156 LD 16 – Enter a dialing pause for the Dial Delay Timer at the Time prompt: Prompt Response Description DDL 0-(70)-511 Dial Delay Timer. ... - TIMR A value of 0 disables the timer. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 690
Page 1648 of 3156 553-3001-306 Hong Kong Digital Trunk Interface Standard 10.
PAGE 691
Page 1649 of 3156 Hot Line Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650 Flexible Hot Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 692
Page 1650 of 3156 Hot Line Feature description Flexible Hot Line Flexible Hot Line (HOT) allows designated analog (500/2500 type) telephones to place calls to a predetermined destination simply by lifting the handset. The destination may be internal or external to the Meridian 1, and the call does not require attendant intervention. Flexible Hot Line (HOT) is provided to designated analog (500/2500 type) telephones on a Class of Service basis.
PAGE 693
Hot Line Page 1651 of 3156 Calling Party Privacy A Hot Line call will carry the Privacy Indicator if the Calling Party Privacy (CPP) code followed by the normal dialing sequence is stored in the Hot Line DN. The CPP will count against the maximum number of digits (currently 31) allowed for the Hot Line DN. China – Flexible Feature Codes - Busy Number Redial Enhanced Flexible Feature Codes - Busy Number Redial Busy Number Redial cannot be used on Flexible Hot Line sets.
PAGE 694
Page 1652 of 3156 Hot Line Make Set Busy Make Set Busy is overridden by the Hot Line feature. If a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone is in Make Set Busy mode, incoming Hot Line calls still terminate (ring) on the telephone. No Hold Conference The Conference-Hot Line key supports only one-way Hot Line calls. On Hold on Loudspeaker It is possible to program Hot Line with a loudspeaker DN, but operation will be the same as for direct dial to a loudspeaker DN.
PAGE 695
Hot Line Page 1653 of 3156 Voice Call The terminating DN of a Voice Call arrangement may be the incoming DN of a two-way Hot Line. When engineering call-modification paths (such as Hunting and Call Forward No Answer), the Hot Line Restriction option will cancel the normal call-modification operation for internal non-Hot Line calls. Feature packaging The Flexible Hot Line feature is contained in Enhanced Hot Line (HOT) package 70. There are no feature package dependencies.
PAGE 696
Page 1654 of 3156 Hot Line Feature operation To make a Flexible Hot Line Call, follow these steps: 1 Lift the handset. The Hot Line number is automatically dialed. 2 To end the call, hang up. Enhanced Hot Line Enhanced Hot Line (EHOT) provides Hot Line services to telephones with programmable keys. This feature is designed for, and is compatible with, analog (500/2500 type) telephones and Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
PAGE 697
Hot Line Page 1655 of 3156 A maximum of 31 digits can be stored against a Hot Line telephone or key. Only one Hot Line list is allowed per customer. HOT cannot access a list created by the list-entry method for Enhanced Hot Line (EHOT). A specific Hot Line key on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone can have access to only one entry in the Hot Line list, but more than one telephone can have access to the same entry.
PAGE 698
Page 1656 of 3156 Hot Line Automatic Line Selection Since the Hot Line key acts as a Single Call Ring (SCR) key, incoming ringing line preference can be applied. Outgoing line preference automatically selects a line other than the current Hot Line, so that a Hot Line call is not accidentally activated. Automatic Redial An Automatic Redial (ARDL) call can be activated from an Enhanced Hot Line key. However, the call is only redialed when the calling party’s HOT key is free.
PAGE 699
Hot Line Page 1657 of 3156 Controlled Class of Service When a Hot Line DN is on a telephone that has Controlled Class of Service activated, Hot Line calls ignore the imposed Class of Service if the System Speed Call (SSC) package is present and the Hot Line list is given an adequate Network Class of Service (NCOS) for the override. Dial Intercom The analog (500/2500 type) Hot Line telephones cannot be members of Dial Intercom Groups (DIGs).
PAGE 700
Page 1658 of 3156 Hot Line Override A Hot Line call can be entered using the Override feature. Permanent Hold Analog (500/2500 type) telephones with EHTA cannot have Permanent Hold. Prime Directory Number If the Hot Line key is assigned to key 0 on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, it acts as the prime DN. When the user goes off-hook without selecting a DN key, the Hot Line is activated and the call is placed without further user action.
PAGE 701
Hot Line Page 1659 of 3156 Feature packaging Enhanced Hot Line (HOT) package 70 requires: • Network Class of Service (NCOS) package 32, and • System Speed Call (SSC) package 34. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 17 – Assign the number of Speed Call lists, including Hot Line lists. 2 LD 15 – Add or change Enhanced Hot Line for a customer.
PAGE 702
Page 1660 of 3156 Hot Line LD 15 – Add or change Enhanced Hot Line for a customer. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: CDB FTR Customer Data Block. Features and Options. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. OPT (HTU) HTR Hot Line (unrestricted) or restricted. This program determines whether the call is going to a Hot Line DN or to any available DN. HTR restricts Hot Line calls to Hot Line DNs, but HTU does not.
PAGE 703
Hot Line Page 1661 of 3156 LD 18 – Add or change a Hot Line Speed Call list. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG OUT Add, change, or remove a Speed Call list. TYPE HTL Hot Line List. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number, as defined in LD 15. For Option 11C. LNSO 0-8190 Hot Line List number (only one Hot Line List per customer). NCOS 0-99 NCOS to be assigned to calls accessing the list. DNSZ xx Maximum number of digits in a list entry (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, or 31).
PAGE 704
Page 1662 of 3156 Hot Line LD 10 – Add Enhanced Hot Line for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: 500 Telephone type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. CLS DTN DIP EHTA (LDN) LNA (XFD) XFA (CWD) CWA (XRD) XRA Digitone or dial pulse service (manual service is not allowed). Enhanced Hot Line allowed. Last Number Redial (denied) allowed – optional. Call Transfer (denied) allowed – optional. Call Waiting (denied) allowed – optional.
PAGE 705
Hot Line Page 1663 of 3156 TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. KEY nn HOT D cc x...x nn HOT L aaa nn HOT D cc x...x xxxx nn HOT L aaa xxx...x nn CH D cc x...x One-way Hot Line key. One-way Hot Line List key. Two-way Hot Line key. nn CH L aaa Combined No Hold Conference and Hot Line List feature Two-way Hot Line List key. Combined No Hold Conference and Direct Hot Line feature nn = key number. cc = number of digits for target DN (1-31). x...x = target DN (up to 31 digits).
PAGE 706
Page 1664 of 3156 553-3001-306 Hot Line Standard 10.
PAGE 707
Page 1665 of 3156 Hunting Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666 Circular Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667 Linear Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668 Secretarial Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 708
Page 1666 of 3156 Hunting Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687 Feature implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687 Task summary list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687 Feature operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 709
Hunting Page 1667 of 3156 Circular Hunting Circular Hunting begins at the dialed DN and travels through every DN in the hunt group. The chain can begin at any point in the circle. The call goes around the circle until answered, or until returned to the initial DN. If all the DNs in the chain are busy, the caller hears busy tone. Figure 46 shows an example of circular hunting.
PAGE 710
Page 1668 of 3156 Hunting Linear Hunting Linear Hunting begins at the dialed DN. The call travels in one direction only when hunting along a linear chain. If a call comes into the second DN of a four-DN chain, it hunts to the third and fourth DNs only. If all the DNs are busy, the caller hears busy tone. Figure 47 shows an example of Linear Hunting. Figure 47 Example of Linear Hunting 1 DN 3001 HUNT 3002 DN 3002 HUNT 3003 2 DN 3003 HUNT 3004 DN 3004 Incoming call Dialed DN 3002 553-5356.
PAGE 711
Hunting Page 1669 of 3156 Secretarial Hunting Secretarial Hunting sends calls to a single Hunt DN, typically a secretary or Voice Mail. When a call comes in to a busy DN, it travels to the central location. Figure 48 shows an example of Secretarial Hunting.
PAGE 712
Page 1670 of 3156 Hunting Figure 48 Example of Secretarial Hunting DN 3002 HUNT 3100 DN 3003 HUNT 3100 DN 3100 DN 3001 HUNT 3100 DN 3004 HUNT 3100 Incoming call Dialed DN 3001 Incoming call Dialed DN 3004 553-5357.EPS Short Hunting Short Hunting takes place along the key strip of any Meridian 1 proprietary telephone. The hunt chain begins on a DN on the key strip. The call hunts up the keys until it reaches a feature key, an unassigned key, or the Last Hunt Key (LHK, defined in LD 11).
PAGE 713
Hunting Page 1671 of 3156 For a TN with Hunting Control enabled, Short Hunt takes precedence over normal Hunting (Circular, Linear, or Secretarial). If the Hunting search selects a TN for a digital telephone, Short Hunt redirects the call before attempting to use the Hunt TN. The hunt chain might become Hunt DN A, Hunt DN B, Short Hunt Sequence C, Short Hunt Sequence D, or Hunt DN E. Figure 49 shows an example of Short Hunting.
PAGE 714
Page 1672 of 3156 Hunting Operating parameters There are no operating parameters associated with this feature Feature interactions Advice of Charge for EuroISDN Calls charged with Advice of Charge that are either extended, transferred or redirected to another set via Hunting, are charged against the last station that answers the call and the controlling station releases.
PAGE 715
Hunting Page 1673 of 3156 Call Forward All Calls Call Forward, Internal Calls Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward takes precedence over Hunting. Call Forward Busy Hunting takes precedence over Call Forward Busy for Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls. When the station receiving a DID call has both Call Forward Busy and Hunting Allowed (HTA) Class of Service, the call is routed along the hunt chain. If all stations in the hunt chain are busy, the call is forwarded to the attendant.
PAGE 716
Page 1674 of 3156 Hunting Call Waiting Station-to-Station Call Waiting If a call comes into a busy DN, it begins the hunting route defined from the called DN. If there are idle DNs on the hunting route, the call becomes a Call Waiting call on the called DN. Hunting takes precedence over Call Waiting. If all steps in the hunt chain are busy, Call Waiting is activated.
PAGE 717
Hunting Page 1675 of 3156 Camp-On Camp-On, Station Hunting takes precedence over Camp-On and Station Camp-On. Capacity Expansion If more than 16 appearances of the same Directory Number (DN) are configured, each hunt step is counted as two, to avoid running out of time slots. China – Toll Call Loss Plan Toll pad switching is also provided after call hunting has been completed.
PAGE 718
Page 1676 of 3156 Hunting Group Call Dial Access to Group Calls Hunting cannot be applied to a Group Call. Group Hunt Group Hunting has priority over Hunting. If the DN attempted for termination by Group Hunting has HTA COS, and if it is busy, Group Hunting continues with the next DN in the group instead of following the DN’s hunting configuration. Hot Line Any Hot Line telephone can be assigned Hunting (excluding Short Hunt) Class of Service, but it applies only to the two-way Hot Line capability.
PAGE 719
Hunting Page 1677 of 3156 If all the telephones in the Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MADN) group are Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, ringing telephones are placed at the top of the DN list, and non-ringing telephones are placed at the bottom. If a Multiple Appearance Directory Number appears in a group with several telephone types, the telephone type affects the position of the TN in the list.
PAGE 720
Page 1678 of 3156 Hunting Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime The Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime (MARP) TN always controls the call redirection for Hunting. Short Hunting takes precedence over Hunting and MARP. The MARP TN is referred to until Short Hunting is encountered. Short Hunting is in control until it expires. When short hunting expires, the MARP TN for the first DN in the Short Hunt sequence takes control.
PAGE 721
Hunting Page 1679 of 3156 Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 10 – Add or change Hunting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. 2 LD 11 – Add or change Hunting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. LD 10 – Add or change Hunting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
PAGE 722
Page 1680 of 3156 Hunting LD 11 – Add or change Hunting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. HUNT xxx...x Hunt DN. xxxx...x removes the DN from the hunting chain. Allow Short Hunting only. 000 LHK xx Last Hunt Key (LHK) number (default is 0). LHK 0 deactivates Short Hunt.
PAGE 723
Hunting • Data Access Card (DAC), or • Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA).
PAGE 724
Page 1682 of 3156 Hunting Class of Service restrictions do not apply to data port trunks. Ring Again, Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection (BARS/NARS), and trunk access restrictions (TARG, TGAR) are the only features that may be applied on calls to data port routes. Feature interactions Conference There are no feature interactions associated with this feature.
PAGE 725
Hunting Page 1683 of 3156 ROUT 0-511 0-127 Trunk route number. For Option 11C. TKTP ADM MDM R232 R422 MMPM Trunk route type. STEP 0-511 0-31 Alternate trunk route number. For Option 11C. TARG 0-31 Trunk Access Restriction Groups (TARGs). - TOV Data port time out. 0-3 0 = No timeout. 1 = 15 minutes. 2 = 30 minutes. 3 = 60 minutes - PSEL (DMDM) TLNK Protocol selection. T-Link or DM-DM protocol. Prompt offered to MCU (TKTP = MMPM).
PAGE 726
Page 1684 of 3156 Hunting - - MOD (NO) YES Modem, (Network): when TRAN = SYN. Prompt offered to MCU (TKTP = MMPM). - - INT (OFF) ON SL-1/100 Interworking. Prompt offered to MCU (TKTP = MMPM). - - CLK (OFF) ON (OFF) = External Clock, ON = Internal, when TRAN = SYN. Prompt offered to MCU (TKTP = MMPM). - - V25 (NO) YES V.25 bis offered only when TRAN = SYN. Prompt offered to MCU (TKTP = MMPM). - - HDLC (NO) YES High Level Data Link Control offered only when V25 = YES.
PAGE 727
Hunting Page 1685 of 3156 Feature operation To access a Data Unit (DU), the user dials the Access Code (ACOD) of the route data block. If a DU is available, a connection is made. If a DU is unavailable, the user receives this message on the terminal screen: “ALL PORTS ARE BUSY. ACTIVATE RING AGAIN?” Select Ring Again and wait until a DU port becomes available. When a user dials a data port, the request is placed in the Ring Again queue until a port becomes idle.
PAGE 728
Page 1686 of 3156 Hunting When Linear Hunting is implemented, the system searches for an available trunk in descending order. A station originating an outgoing call is connected to the last available trunk (highest available trunk route member number) of the trunk route accessed. The last trunk route member is always the first choice for outgoing calls and the first trunk route member is always the last choice.
PAGE 729
Hunting Page 1687 of 3156 Operating parameters The Public Exchange/Central Office (CO) governs incoming trunk hunting. The Meridian 1 has no control over the order of incoming trunks. Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 16 – Implement Linear or Round Robin Trunk Hunting for a trunk route.
PAGE 730
Page 1688 of 3156 553-3001-306 Hunting Standard 10.
PAGE 731
Page 1689 of 3156 Hunting by Call Type Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 732
Page 1690 of 3156 Hunting by Call Type • If a busy extension's Class of Service includes HTD and HBTD, internal calls to the extension receive busy tone. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls to the extension which have Class of Service FBA are forwarded to the attendant. DID calls to the extension which have a Class of Service of FBD receive busy tone. • If a busy extension's Class of Service include HTD and HBTA, internal calls to the extension receive busy tone.
PAGE 733
Hunting by Call Type Page 1691 of 3156 Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 10 – Create or modify the analog (500/2500 type) telephone data blocks to allow/deny Hunt by Call Type: 2 LD 11 – Create or modify the Meridian 1 proprietary telephone data blocks to allow/deny Hunt by Call Type: LD 10 – Create or modify the analog (500/2500 type) telephone data blocks to allow/deny Hunt by Call Type: Prompt Response Description (HBTD) HBTA
PAGE 734
Page 1692 of 3156 553-3001-306 Hunting by Call Type Standard 10.
PAGE 735
Page 1693 of 3156 ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Screen Activation (NWSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible DN Length (FXDN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meridian Mail Interactions (MMIA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 736
Page 1694 of 3156 ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions Network Screen Activation (NWSA) Calls intended to terminate on one node but which are redirected to an ICP position via ICP forward, Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward No Answer, Call Forward Busy, or Hunt, are presented on the ICP terminal (ICT) at that position. Direct calls from another node to an ICP position are presented on the ICT at that ICP position.
PAGE 737
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions Page 1695 of 3156 Meridian Mail Interactions (MMIA) Meridian Mail and ICP may be configured in LD 15 for the same customer number, by answering “YES” to both the IMS prompt and the ICP prompt. Meridian Mail and ICP can then be used by the same customer, independent of each other. A set may be configured to have its calls forwarded to Meridian Mail or the ICP, or a mixture of both (e.g.
PAGE 738
Page 1696 of 3156 ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions • if a set has been configured to have call forwarding to both ICP and Meridian Mail, retrieving of messages by activating the Message Waiting key (MWK) can only be done for either ICP or Meridian Mail, and • the Message Waiting lamp indication cannot support both ICP and Meridian Mail simultaneously (i.e.
PAGE 739
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions Page 1697 of 3156 Slow Answer Recall for External Transferred Calls When an ICP position set transfers an external call across an ISDN network, the slow answer recall timer is set at the transferring node to prevent the terminating set to be rung indefinitely. When the slow answer recall timer times out, the transferred call is recalled to the attendant at the transferring node.
PAGE 740
Page 1698 of 3156 ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 15 – For NWSA, enter up to 13 digits for ICDN and ECDN. 2 LD 15 – For FXDN, set the DN length and any padding digits at the ICDL and ICPD prompts. 3 LD 15 – For MMIA, enter “YES” to both the Meridian Mail prompt (IMS) and the Intercept Computer prompt (ICP).
PAGE 741
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions Page 1699 of 3156 LD 15 – For FXDN, set the DN length and any padding digits at the ICDL and ICPD prompts. Prompt Response Description TYPE: ICP–DATA Intercept computer update. - ICP YES ICP is available. - ICDL 3-(4)-7 Length of DN sent to and received from the ICP. - ICPD (0)-9 Padding digit for DNs shorter than specified in ICDL. ... ...
PAGE 742
Page 1700 of 3156 553-3001-306 ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions Standard 10.
PAGE 743
Page 1701 of 3156 In-Band Automatic Number Identification Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702 Call Detail Recording (CDR) records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 744
Page 1702 of 3156 In-Band Automatic Number Identification Feature description The In-Band Automatic Number Identification (IANI) feature provides the ability to display a ten-digit calling party number during setup (signaling) over a non-Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) T1 trunk. The Automatic Number Identification (ANI) digits are displayed when they autoterminate to an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Directory Number (DN) agent telephone with digit display.
PAGE 745
In-Band Automatic Number Identification Page 1703 of 3156 Call Detail Recording (CDR) records Because IANI and Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) cannot be configured on the same trunk group, the IANI report is able to appear in place of the Calling Line Identification (CLID) records.
PAGE 746
Page 1704 of 3156 In-Band Automatic Number Identification Should the system initialize while an agent is active on an IANI call, there will be no impact on the call. However, if any call modification (such as, Call Transfer or Conference) takes place, the ANI number is lost. A Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) receiver is required to interpret the DTMF tones with an IANI number. Feature interactions The IANI feature interacts heavily with ACD.
PAGE 747
In-Band Automatic Number Identification Page 1705 of 3156 Attendant Recall If an ACD Agent is active on an IANI call and activates the Attendant Recall (ARC) key to call the attendant, the agent’s display shows the attendant number when the attendant answers the call. The ANI number reappears when the attendant releases. Call Consultation If the agent is active on an IANI call and presses the TRN key for call consultation, the display is cleared.
PAGE 748
Page 1706 of 3156 In-Band Automatic Number Identification R2MFC Calling Number Identification/Call Detail Recording Enhancements Inband ANI trunks do not support CNI. If a CNI is available in addition to the IANI on an IANI trunk, the IANI would be used for the CLID. Time and date If the agent presses the Time and Date (TAD) key while on an IANI call, the time and date remain displayed throughout the call. To display the ANI number again, place the call on hold and retrieve it. The ANI number reappears.
PAGE 749
In-Band Automatic Number Identification Page 1707 of 3156 Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 16 – Identify the route as an In-Band Automatic Number Identification route. 2 LD 23 – Send the IANI messages across the Auxiliary Processor Link (APL). LD 16 – Identify the route as an In-Band Automatic Number Identification route. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add or change an IANI route.
PAGE 750
Page 1708 of 3156 553-3001-306 In-Band Automatic Number Identification Standard 10.
PAGE 751
Page 1709 of 3156 Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 752
Page 1710 of 3156 Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement Attendant Recall If an RDI-intercepted call that is extended by the attendant to the destination party having RDI Class of Service is either transferred back or recalled to the attendant, then the attendant recall ICI lights up and not the RDI-intercept ICI.
PAGE 753
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement Page 1711 of 3156 LD 15 – Respond to the ICI prompt with the ICI number: Prompt Response Description x RDI ICI number; RDI intercept. ... ICI x = key number (from 0 to 19). Feature operation When the call is intercepted to the attendant, the RDI-intercept ICI becomes lit. The attendant can then answer the call, and extend it to the destination party if desired.
PAGE 754
Page 1712 of 3156 553-3001-306 Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement Standard 10.
PAGE 755
Page 1713 of 3156 Incoming DID Digit Conversion Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Digit Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partial Digit Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Digit Conversion . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Call Termination . .
PAGE 756
Page 1714 of 3156 Incoming DID Digit Conversion Full Digit Conversion All the digits received are converted to another string of digits as specified in the conversion table. Different strings of digits can be converted to the same internal Directory Number (DN). Partial Digit Conversion Not all of the digits received from the Central Office (CO) are converted. The remaining digits may remain unchanged, and the whole string of digits is forwarded to the Directory Number (DN) translator.
PAGE 757
Incoming DID Digit Conversion Page 1715 of 3156 When DEXT = NO (LD 16) the Meridian 1 proprietary telephone display looks like this: AAAA:MMM where: AAAA = route access code, and MMM = Route Member Number. The display may show the name of the route if Call Party Name Display (CPND) is allowed.
PAGE 758
Page 1716 of 3156 Incoming DID Digit Conversion When DEXT = YES (LD 16) the Attendant Console display looks like this: AAAA:MMM#:xxxx iiii where: AAAA = route access code MMM = Route Member Number # = Special character (identifying the received digits) xxxx = originally dialed digits, and iiii = Internal DN (called party). Incoming Call Redirection If an incoming call is redirected to a Centralized Attendant Services (CAS) or local attendant, the local DN is used to extend the call.
PAGE 759
Incoming DID Digit Conversion Page 1717 of 3156 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) – Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) The construction of an ANI message does not care if Incoming Digit Conversion is used. The DN sent as ANI is the actual DN of the set, not necessarily the Direct Inward Dialing (DID) number to dial to reach the set. Therefore, if an external party uses a DN, delivered in an ANI message, for making a call to the corresponding extension, the call may fail.
PAGE 760
Page 1718 of 3156 Incoming DID Digit Conversion Feature packaging Incoming Digit Conversion (IDC) package 113 requires New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) package 49. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 15 – Specify maximum number of Incoming Digit Conversion trees allowed. 2 LD 49 – Create IDC tables to convert incoming Direct Inward Dialing digits by specifying the IDC tree and customer numbers.
PAGE 761
Incoming DID Digit Conversion Page 1719 of 3156 LD 49 – Create IDC tables to convert incoming Direct Inward Dialing digits by specifying the IDC tree and customer numbers. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW Create tables. TYPE IDC IDC tables. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number, as defined in LD 15. For Option 11C. DCNO 0-254 IDC tree number. IDGT 0-9999 0-9999 DN or range of DNs to be converted.
PAGE 762
Page 1720 of 3156 Incoming DID Digit Conversion LD 16 – Enable digit conversion for required DID trunk routes. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE RDB Route Data Block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number, as defined in LD 15. For Option 11C. ROUT 0-511 0-127 Route number. For Option 11C. IDC YES Use digit conversion for this route. - DCNO 0-254 IDC tree number. - NDNO 0-254 IDC conversion table for Night mode. - DEXT (NO) YES (Do not) allow Digit Display.
PAGE 763
Page 1721 of 3156 Incoming Digit Conversion Enhancement Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 764
Page 1722 of 3156 Incoming Digit Conversion Enhancement New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) is required to operate IDC. Since NFCR trees and IDC tables share the same structure, the total combined number of NFCR trees and IDC tables cannot exceed 255 per customer. Feature interactions Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) – Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) The construction of an ANI message does not care if Incoming Digit Conversion is used.
PAGE 765
Incoming Digit Conversion Enhancement Page 1723 of 3156 Feature implementation For implementation procedures refer to Networking Features and Services (553-2901-301). Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 766
Page 1724 of 3156 553-3001-306 Incoming Digit Conversion Enhancement Standard 10.
PAGE 767
Page 1725 of 3156 Incremental Software Management Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726 System monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729 System administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 768
Page 1726 of 3156 Incremental Software Management Feature description Incremental Software Management (ISM) is a feature that provides flexibility and control over system configuration and implementation. With ISM, software ordering and pricing is based on the total count of used ISM counters. See Table 52 for a list of ISMs counted. Table 52 ISMs counted (Part 1 of 3) A TN configured in Overlays 10, 11, 12, or 14 ISMs counted 1.5 Mb DTI trunk Traditional Trunks 1.
PAGE 769
Incremental Software Management Page 1727 of 3156 Table 52 (Continued) ISMs counted (Part 2 of 3) A TN configured in Overlays 10, 11, 12, or 14 ISMs counted Digital AST and ACD set AST, Digital Telephones and ACD Agents Digital AST set AST and Digital Telephone Digital Cordless Set (DCS) Wireless Telephones Digital data set Data Ports Digital voice set Digital Telephones IDA trunk Traditional Trunks ISA trunk Traditional Trunks ISL trunk Traditional Trunks ITG 1.
PAGE 770
Page 1728 of 3156 Incremental Software Management Table 52 (Continued) ISMs counted (Part 3 of 3) A TN configured in Overlays 10, 11, 12, or 14 ISMs counted Phantom digital set Wireless Telephones R232 DAC Data Ports R422 DAC Data Ports Real ACD analog set ACD Agents and Analogue Telephones Real ACD digital set ACD Agents and Digital Telephones VNS trunk Traditional Trunks VTN i2004 set INTERNET TELEPHONES Note: Every TN configured counts against the TN ISM.
PAGE 771
Incremental Software Management Page 1729 of 3156 For information on the above features, please refer to the appropriate feature modules in this guide. System monitoring To assist in monitoring system growth, each time an overlay is used, a header appears in the affected overlay, reflecting the system status.
PAGE 772
Page 1730 of 3156 Incremental Software Management Examples of header increments The following examples show the header changes when TNs, ACD positions, ACD-DNs, RAN Broadcast routes, D-Channels, Application Module Links, Digital Subscriber Loops (DSLs), and Meridian Packet Handlers (MPH) are added or deleted. These overlays have not been modified by the ISM feature, except for the addition of the new headers. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 773
Incremental Software Management Page 1731 of 3156 Example 1 – Adding an analog (500/2500 type) set Table 53 shows the Overlay 10 header before an analog (500/2500 type) set is added.
PAGE 774
Page 1732 of 3156 Incremental Software Management Table 54 shows the Overlay 10 header after an analog (500/2500 type) set is added.
PAGE 775
Incremental Software Management TN Page 1733 of 3156 lscu cu Terminal Number. For Option 11C. AGTA ACD services for analog (500/2500 type) sets allowed. ACD x...x yyyy Feature name and related data, where: x....x = the ACD DN and yyyy = the ACD position. ... CLS ... FTR Table 56 shows the Overlay 10 header after an analog (500/2500 type) set associated with an ACD-DN is added.
PAGE 776
Page 1734 of 3156 Incremental Software Management Example 3 – Adding a trunk Table 57 shows the Overlay 14 header before a trunk is added.
PAGE 777
Incremental Software Management Page 1735 of 3156 Table 58 shows the Overlay 14 header after a trunk is added.
PAGE 778
Page 1736 of 3156 Incremental Software Management ROUT 0-511 0-127 Route Number. For Option 11C. TKTP RAN Recorded Announcement trunk. Table 60 shows the Overlay 16 header after a route is added. Table 60 Overlay 16 header after service change MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188802 USED: 154954 TOT: 343756 USED: 2 TOT: 511 DISK RECS AVAIL: 94 RAN RTE AVAIL: 509 Example 5 – Adding a D-channel (DCH) Table 61 shows the Overlay 17 header before a D-Channel is added.
PAGE 779
Incremental Software Management Page 1737 of 3156 Table 62 shows the Overlay 17 header after a D-channel is added. Table 62 Overlay 17 header after service change MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188857 USED: 154899 TOT: 343756 DCH AVAIL: 6 USED: 9 TOT: 15 AML AVAIL: 5 USED: 4 TOT: 9 DISK RECS AVAIL: 94 Example 6 – Adding an Automatic Call Distribution Directory Number (ACD-DN) Table 63 shows the Overlay 23 header before an ACD-DN is added.
PAGE 780
Page 1738 of 3156 Incremental Software Management Table 64 shows the Overlay 23 header after an ACD-DN is added. Table 64 Overlay 23 header after service change MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188513 USED: 155243 TOT: 343756 USED: 11 TOT: 15 DISK RECS AVAIL: 94 ACD DNS AVAIL: 4 Example 7 – Adding a Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL) Table 65 shows the Overlay 27 header before a Digital Subscriber Loop is added.
PAGE 781
Incremental Software Management Page 1739 of 3156 Table 66 shows the Overlay 27 header after a Digital Subscriber Loop is added.
PAGE 782
Page 1740 of 3156 Incremental Software Management Printing ISM System Limits When REQ is set to SLT in Overlay 22, ISM system limits are printed. The limits established for the system, the used parameters, the remaining parameters, and other system information is printed when REQ = SLT. You can update the value of ISM limits either through sysload or the Instant ISM feature. You can print the new ISM limits through Overlay 22 after the update is complete.
PAGE 783
Incremental Software Management Page 1741 of 3156 BRI DSL 100 LEFT 98 USED 2 LTID 100 LEFT 100 USED 0 DCH 15 LEFT 5 USED 10 AML 9 LEFT 4 USED 5 MPH DSL 100 LEFT 99 USED 1 RAN CON 32767 LEFT 32767 USED 0 511 LEFT 509 USED 2 10000 LEFT 10000 USED 0 RAN RTE MUS CON IDLE_SET_DISPLAY XXXXX System administration When the predefined ISM limits are reached, an error message indicates that further database additions are blocked.
PAGE 784
Page 1742 of 3156 Incremental Software Management For example, if a system has 150 TNs configured and the new software only has an ISM limit of 100 TNs, then the system will eliminate the additional 50 TNs. A SYS message appears if this situation occurs. CAUTION System information will be lost. Upon software upgrade, if SYS message 4327, 4328, 4329, or 4330 appears at SYSLOAD, then SYSLOAD previous system disks. Order ISM disks with sufficient system parameters configured.
PAGE 785
Incremental Software Management Page 1743 of 3156 The ACD Agent counter excludes Meridian Mail and Call Pilot ports. All ACD Agents configured in Overlay 10 and 11 count against the ACD Agents and Analogue Telephones or Digital Telephones counters. The port configured in Overlay 11 for Meridian Integrated Products such as MICB is an ACD Agent. It will count against ACD Agents and Digital Telephones counters.
PAGE 786
Page 1744 of 3156 Incremental Software Management The Analogue Telephones ISM counter will count every analog telephone configured in Overlay 10, except wireless sets and phantom sets. This includes AST sets, ACD agents, and AST sets configured as ACD agents. The Wireless Telephones counter includes CT2 and (M)DECT sets configured in Overlay 10. The TMDI ISM counter will count every TMDI configuration on a small system.
PAGE 787
Incremental Software Management Page 1745 of 3156 — ISDN Application Module Link for Third Party Vendors (IAP3P) package 153 • AST — Command Status Link package 77 — Application Module Link (AML) package 209 • ATTENDANT CONSOLES — Attendant Consoles is included in base X11 system software. • CLASS TELEPHONES — Calling Number Delivery (CNUMB) package 332; or — Calling Name Delivery (CNAME) package 333.
PAGE 788
Page 1746 of 3156 Incremental Software Management — Package requirements for traditional trunks vary depending on the type of trunk configured. Refer to Refer to Administration (553-3001-311) and Maintenance (553-3001-511) for information on specific trunk package requirements. • WIRELESS — Meridian 1 Companion Option (MCMO) package 240 Feature implementation There are no specific implementation procedures for this feature.
PAGE 789
Page 1747 of 3156 Information Notification Service for Japan Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 790
Page 1748 of 3156 Information Notification Service for Japan On an incoming call with INS-J, the Meridian 1 extracts information such as: Calling Party Number, Calling Party Name, Called Party Number, Date and Time, and, if applicable, Reason for absence of Calling Party Number/Calling Party Name. This information is passed on to the terminating party, which can be: • a trunk • a terminal or • an application. The INS-J information is sent by the CO in Frequency Shifted Key (FSK) format.
PAGE 791
Information Notification Service for Japan • Page 1749 of 3156 Attendant Console Applications • Meridian Mail • Meridian Link • Meridian IVR • Customer Controlled Routing • Symposium Call Center Server Call Detail Recording (CDR) The INS-J feature is enabled and disabled on a per unit basis using a class of service in LD 14. Figure 50 shows the operation of the INS-J feature.
PAGE 792
Page 1750 of 3156 Information Notification Service for Japan Figure 51 shows the system composition required for the INS-J CLID delivery: Figure 51 System composition for INS-J CLID delivery Originating Node (Japan CO) Public/Private Switch Japan Analog(JCO/JDID) trunk with INS-J information Attendant Console Meridian 1 (Node 1) BCS set D-XUTJ M1 S/W Analog set with display capability ISDN/MFC TRUNK Meridian 1 (Node 2) 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 793
Information Notification Service for Japan Page 1751 of 3156 Operating parameters This feature is only applicable for incoming analog trunks. If the terminating set/trunk cannot receive the information, then the Analog CLI information will not be displayed nor transmitted. As per existing M1 functionality, only the first 16 digits of the Calling Party/ Called Party number will be processed. Display of Katakana characters is not supported. Any Katakana characters received will be ignored.
PAGE 794
Page 1752 of 3156 Information Notification Service for Japan Conference/No Hold Conference When a set receives an incoming call and then initiates a conference call, the information of the initiating set will be delivered to the terminating set, and not the Analog CLI information. Direct Inward System Access If a user enters the Meridian 1 through DISA dialing, the information passed on is that of the incoming trunk and not of the DISA DN.
PAGE 795
Information Notification Service for Japan Page 1753 of 3156 Feature packaging This feature introduces a new package: Analog CLI (ACLI), package number 349. The ACLI package requires Japan package 97. The UK package (package 190) is incompatible with ACLI, and should not be packaged if ACLI is turned on. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 14 – Configure the Analog CLI Class of Service on a port-by-port basis.
PAGE 796
Page 1754 of 3156 Information Notification Service for Japan LD 16 – Configure the new ring validation timer. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE RDB Route Data Block. ... ... TKTP TIE COT ... ... CNTL YES Changes to controls of timers. TIMR RGV 256 Ring validation timer to be changed to 256. ... ... TIE or Central Office trunk. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 797
Page 1755 of 3156 Instant ISM Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1755 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756 System initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 798
Page 1756 of 3156 Instant ISM During keycode activation via the existing prompts in overlay 143, if the keycode is eligible for instant activation (i.e., ISM parameters are the only parameters that have changed relative to the current system keycode, and no ISM limits are decreasing), the ISM limits will be upgraded “instantly.” Following successful activation, a system message introduced by the Instant ISM feature will be displayed.
PAGE 799
Instant ISM Page 1757 of 3156 System initialization If system initialization occurs while a new keycode is being instantly activated, the Meridian 1 software will attempt to complete the keycode activation if at all possible. However, depending on when the initialization occurred, the software may not be able to complete keycode activation. After the system has completed initialization, the craftsperson should print the active ISM parameters via overlay 22.
PAGE 800
Page 1758 of 3156 Instant ISM Electronic Brand Line (EBLN/BRAND) Unlike other ISM parameters which define the maximum configuration limits for various resources, the BRAND ISM parameter defines which Electronic Brand Line feature option the system is allowed to use. The same limitation applies to the BRAND parameter as applies to other ISM limits, that is, the BRAND parameter must be unchanged or increased if the ISM limits are to be updated instantly without the need for a Sysload.
PAGE 801
Instant ISM Page 1759 of 3156 Instant ISM parameter upgrade using a keycode diskette Perform the following to instantly activate a keycode without a Sysload: Note: For a dual-CPU (redundant) system, leave the system in full redundant mode (hard-disk and CPU redundancy). 1 Log in on a system terminal and load overlay 143. >LD 143 CCBR000 . 2 Insert the new keycode diskette into the floppy drive on the active IODU/C. 3 Enter the KDIF command and select keycode comparison options.
PAGE 802
Page 1760 of 3156 Instant ISM Note: In the following example, the (REC) currently used keycode will be compared with the new keycode disk in floppy drive F0. The limits shown are for example purposes only. .KDIF REC F0 Validating Keycode File /p/install/keycode.rec ... OK Validating Keycode File /f0/keycode.kcd ...
PAGE 803
Instant ISM Page 1761 of 3156 Note: ( ) indicates that information is not available ISM Limits 1st keycode: 2nd keycode: Loop Limit : 32 32 Sys TNs Limit : 10 11 ACD Agt Limit : 10 10 ACD DNs Limit : 10 10 AST Limit : 10 10 ...... Common packages for both keycodes: 0-2 4-5 7-25 28-29 32-55 58-65 ...... Additional packages in the 2nd keycode: < 30-31 . 4 Select the new keycode for activation using the KNEW command. .
PAGE 804
Page 1762 of 3156 Instant ISM 5 Load Overlay 22 and confirm that the new ISM parameters have been updated. >LD 22 REQ SLT .... 6 553-3001-306 See“Reverting to the previous keycode with the KRVR command” on page 1768 if ISM limits are not increased or problems exist. Standard 10.
PAGE 805
Instant ISM Page 1763 of 3156 Instant ISM parameter upgrade using HyperTerminal® For Options 51C, 61C, and 81C systems, perform the following to instantly activate a keycode without a Sysload: For a dual-CPU (redundant) system, leave the system in full redundant mode (hard-disk and CPU redundancy). 1 On a PC, access the Meridian 1 system (via a modem) with HyperTerminal® (provided with Windows 95): • Click the Start button | Programs | Accessories | HyperTerminal.
PAGE 806
Page 1764 of 3156 Instant ISM 9 Press the Enter key. The Keycode is checked for CRC errors and is uploaded to the hard disk. Enter the following command: KDIF REC HD to compare the existing keycode with the new keycode on the hard disk Ensure that the new keycode does not lower ISM limits or reduce features compared with the existing keycode.
PAGE 807
Instant ISM Page 1765 of 3156 Instant ISM parameter upgrade for Option 11C Option 11C systems For Option 11C systems, perform the following to instantly activate a keycode without a Sysload: 1 Log in and load overlay 143 >LD 143 CCBR000 . 2 Enter the UPGRADE command. . UPGRADE The “Software Installation Main Menu” is displayed: SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROGRAM ************************************* Verify Security ID: XXXXXXXX ************************************** Software Installation Main Menu: 1.
PAGE 808
Page 1766 of 3156 Instant ISM 5 Indicate that the current Feature Sets and/or Packages will remain the same by selecting “n” to the following requests. • Do you wish to change feature sets? (y/n/[a]bort) : N Keeping Current Feature Set. • Do you wish to add packages? (y/n/[a]bort) : N The current ISM Parameters are printed to the TTY. 6 The ISM parameters shown below are a sample configuration only. Current ISM Parameters : TNS (10) AGNT (10) ACDN (10) AST (10) DSL (10) ...
PAGE 809
Instant ISM Page 1767 of 3156 11 New ISM Parameters : TNS (10) AGNT (11) ACDN (10) AST (10) DSL (10) ... 12 Is this correct? (y/n/[a]bort) : 13 Enter y if the new ISM parameters are correct. If the ISM parameters are not correct select n and reconfigure the ISM parameters. The system will display the Security ID and Current AUX ID. 14 Security ID: XXXXXXXX Current AUX ID : XXXXXXXX Do you wish to change the AUX ID? (y/n/[a]bort) : 15 In response to the prompt “Do you wish to change the AUX ID?,” enter n.
PAGE 810
Page 1768 of 3156 Instant ISM 21 Keycode validation successful. Are you sure you wish to perform the upgrade? (y/n/[a]bort) : 22 In response to the prompt “Are you sure you wish to perform the upgrade?,” enter y. If the new keycodes correct for instant activation, it will be activated without further user action, and the following message is given: Upgrade was completed and activated successfully.
PAGE 811
Instant ISM Page 1769 of 3156 Otherwise, if the keycode is not eligible for instant activation, a Sysload is needed to activate the new keycode and the following system message is given: CCBR009 New Keycode accepted. It will be activated during the next restart.
PAGE 812
Page 1770 of 3156 553-3001-306 Instant ISM Standard 10.
PAGE 813
Page 1771 of 3156 Integrated Messaging System Link Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1771 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 814
Page 1772 of 3156 Integrated Messaging System Link Integrated Messaging System (IMS) Link provides the support required for third-party messaging systems to interface with the Meridian 1. The calling party can leave voice messages to be retrieved by the called party at any time. Users calling from inside or outside the Meridian 1 system can leave and retrieve messages.
PAGE 815
Integrated Messaging System Link Page 1773 of 3156 Feature packaging Integrated Messaging System (IMS) package 35, requires the following packages: • Basic ACD (BACD) package 40 • ACD Package A (ACDA) package 45, and • Message Center (MWC) package 46. • Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) package 109. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 17 – Add or change the link to a messaging system.
PAGE 816
Page 1774 of 3156 Integrated Messaging System Link LD 17 – Add or change the link to a messaging system. Before adding, changing, or removing a link, the device must be disabled. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE CFN ADAN Configuration Record. Gate opener. IOTB (NO) YES (Do not) allow changes to input/output devices. ADAN NEW CHG TTY Add or change a messaging system link to the Meridian 1. 0-15 - USER APL This link is an Auxiliary Processor Link (APL).
PAGE 817
Integrated Messaging System Link - CTYP aaaa Page 1775 of 3156 Card type, where: aaaa = DCHI, MSDL, MSPS, SDI, SDI2, SDI4, or XSDI. - DNUM 0-15 Device number to be printed automatically (same as ADAN number). - USER APL This link is an Auxiliary Processor Link (APL). TYPE PARM System parameters. - AXQI (20)-255 Number of call registers to be used for receipt of messages from the messaging system.
PAGE 818
Page 1776 of 3156 Integrated Messaging System Link - - APL 0-15 Port number of the link from UST to the messaging system. - UMG (NO) YES User-to-User Messaging (UMG) feature (is not) enabled. - - APL 0-15 Port number of the link from UMG to the messaging system. LD 23 – Add or change ACD data for Integrated Messaging System Link feature. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE ACD ACD Data Block. CUST 0-99 Customer number.
PAGE 819
Integrated Messaging System Link Page 1777 of 3156 LD 11 – Add or change IMS attendant capability for each Meridian 1 proprietary telephone. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: Telephone type, where: aaaa aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, 3000. TN lscu Terminal Number. CLS (IMD) IMA This telephone (is not) is an IMS attendant.
PAGE 820
Page 1778 of 3156 553-3001-306 Integrated Messaging System Link Standard 10.
PAGE 821
Page 1779 of 3156 Integrated Services Digital Network Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) provides standard digital interfaces between telephones, terminals, and telecommunication networks. ISDN uses a common signaling protocol transmitted over a dedicated data channel called the D-channel. The D-channel carries call setup and feature activation information to the call destination. This allows users network-wide access to features.
PAGE 822
Page 1780 of 3156 553-3001-306 Integrated Services Digital Network Standard 10.
PAGE 823
Page 1781 of 3156 Integrated Voice and Data Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 824
Page 1782 of 3156 Integrated Voice and Data For more information on Integrated Voice and Data refer to the Nortel Networks technical publication Meridian Data Services: Description (5532731-100). Operating parameters Hunting is not allowed with the Modem Pool Line Card (MPLC) pack. No analog (500/2500 type) telephone can be assigned to the MPLC pack. Collocated SL-1 telephones can only have three key/lamp strips, due to physical constraints.
PAGE 825
Integrated Voice and Data Page 1783 of 3156 6 LD 14 – Define a DLC as a trunk for each data port within the data port group. 7 LD 10 – Define a Modem Pool Line Card (MPLC) for each modem in the data port group. 8 LD 16 – Define a route data block for each Central Office (CO), FEX, TIE, or WATS trunk route to a remote system. 9 LD 14 – Define each trunk within the route.
PAGE 826
Page 1784 of 3156 Integrated Voice and Data LD 11 – Add or change ADM (of an SL-1 telephone/ADM pair) associated with a Data Line Card (DLC) data port pair. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: SL1 Telephone type. TN lscu Terminal Number – loop (0–159), shelf (0–1), card (1–10), unit (1, 3, 5, 7); the loop, shelf, and card must be the same as those specified for the companion SL-1 telephone; the unit must be the next subsequent unit to the companion SL1 telephone (e.g.
PAGE 827
Integrated Voice and Data Page 1785 of 3156 LD 11 – Add or change DLC data port associated with a standalone ADM. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: SL1 Telephone type. TN lscu Terminal Number. CDEN SD Single density card. CLS WTD Warning Tone Denied. KEY 0 DN xxx...x 9 RLS Key 0, data Directory Number. Key 9, Release key. Note: Other features/functions must not be assigned to keys 1-8.
PAGE 828
Page 1786 of 3156 KEY 0 1 2 3 4 6 Integrated Voice and Data DN xxx...x DN xxx...x TRN ADL x...x RGA SCC 0-8190 or 6 SCU 0-8190 Key 0, data Directory Number. Key 1, optional secondary data DN. Key 2, Call Transfer key (optional). Key 3, Autodial DN (optional). Key 4, Ring Again key (optional). Speed Call Controller, Speed Call List number (optional; must be on key 6 if equipped). Speed Call User, Speed Call List number (optional; must be on key 6 if equipped). Release key, must be key 9.
PAGE 829
Integrated Voice and Data Page 1787 of 3156 LD 10 – Define a Modem Pool Line Card (MPLC) for each modem in the data port group. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: 500 Telephone type. TN lscu Terminal Number. CDEN SD DD 4D Single, double, or quad density card. DN xxx...x Voice Frequency Directory Number; must be the same as that telephone by switches in the ADM. Note: The trunk route defined for the data port group in LD 16 cannot be used.
PAGE 830
Page 1788 of 3156 Integrated Voice and Data LD 14 – Define each trunk within the route. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Create a new trunk or modify an existing one. TYPE COT FEX TIE WAT Trunk type. TN lscu Terminal Number. CDEN SD DD Single or double density card. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 831
Page 1789 of 3156 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Completion Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RON/TRON Signaling on XFEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L1 Signaling on XFEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LDR Signaling on Italian DID card (XIDID) . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790 1790 1790 1790 Operating parameters . . .
PAGE 832
Page 1790 of 3156 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Completion Feature description RON/TRON Signaling on XFEM RON/TRON signaling is required for the Italian Extended Flexible E&M card (XFEM). RON/TRON is similar in operation to the current E&M signaling, the difference being that instead of an Answer Acknowledge, a Seize Acknowledge is sent by the far end and it remains for the duration of the call.
PAGE 833
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Completion Page 1791 of 3156 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) Multifrequency Compelled Signaling for Socotel (MFE) MFC, MFE, L1 signaling and RON/TRON signaling are mutually exclusive. Tone to Last Party This feature provides a special tone (default value is busy tone) to both analog (500/2500 type) telephones and trunks in half disconnect state. The operation of this feature is unchanged for trunks working with L1 or RON/TRON.
PAGE 834
Page 1792 of 3156 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Completion LD 16 – Configure a RON/TRON signaling trunk route. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW, CHG New, or change. TYPE RDB Route data block. TKTP TIE TIE trunk. CNTL YES Change control or timers. ... - TIMR Timer. DDL 0-(70)-1023 Dial Delay timer. The DDL timer is set at 512 ms. for the RT (RON/TRON) start arrangement. DSI 128-(34944)499200 Disconnect Supervision timer. EOD 128-(13952)32640 End-of-dial timer.
PAGE 835
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Completion Page 1793 of 3156 LD 14 – Configure RON/TRON Signaling trunk. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data or change existing data. TYPE TIE Trunk type. lscu cu Terminal Number. 51C, 61C, and 81C Option 11C XTRK XFEM Extended Flexible E&M trunk card. SIGL EAM E&M two-wire. STRI RT RON/TRON incoming signaling start arrangement. STRO RT RON/TRON outgoing signaling start arrangement. CLS DTN Digitone. TN ...
PAGE 836
Page 1794 of 3156 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Completion L1 Signaling on XFEM Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 16 – Configure L1 signaling on a XFEM TIE trunk route with Proceed to Send expected after an outgoing seize and answer supervision. 2 LD 14 – Configure a L1 Signaling trunk. LD 16 – Configure L1 signaling on a XFEM TIE trunk route with Proceed to Send expected after an outgoing seize and answer supervision.
PAGE 837
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Completion SST xx Page 1795 of 3156 Seizure Supervision timer for trunks with delay dial (DDL), wink (WNK), and ground (GRD) start arrangements. xx = a minimum value of 1-(3)-15 seconds for GRD, and five seconds for DDL, WNK, RT (RON/TRON) start arrangement, and L1 signaling. DTD NO Dial Tone Detection. MDTD 1-(5)-31 Minimum Dial Tone Detection Delay for route in seconds. DLTN NO Provide Dial Tone to the far end. LD 14 – Configure a L1 Signaling trunk.
PAGE 838
Page 1796 of 3156 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Completion LDR signaling on XIDID Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 16 – Configure LDR signaling on XIDID trunk route. 2 LD 14 – Configure LDR signaling on XIDID trunk. LD 16 – Configure LDR signaling on XIDID trunk route. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data or change existing data. TYPE RDB Route data block. TIE Trunk type. ... TKTP ...
PAGE 839
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Completion Page 1797 of 3156 STRI IMM Immediate incoming start arrangement. STRO IMM Immediate outgoing start arrangement. SUPN YES Answer and disconnect supervision required. CLS NTC Non-transmission compensated. ... Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 840
Page 1798 of 3156 553-3001-306 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Completion Standard 10.
PAGE 841
Page 1799 of 3156 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Software Support Enhancements Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1800 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1801 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 842
Page 1800 of 3156 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Software Support Enhancements • XFCOT – The Autoguard function is enhanced with an Autoguard Repeat Prevention (ATP) timer. This timer denies outgoing calls on a trunk after seize failure during the time configured for ATP. Fastguard functionality is added to prevent call collision between incoming and outgoing calls.
PAGE 843
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Software Support Enhancements Page 1801 of 3156 Auto configuration of an XTD card takes place: • If an XTD card is inserted in a slot of an IPE shelf for which nothing is configured in the software. In such a case, XTD Table 0 parameters are used, and all units have DTD and DTR capability. • If an XTD card is inserted in a slot of an IPE shelf for which at least one XTD unit is already configured in software.
PAGE 844
Page 1802 of 3156 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Software Support Enhancements Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 14 – Configure XFEM BPO trunk type signaling, and the Balance Impedance Adjustment on XDID trunk. 2 LD 16 – Configure the Autoguard Repeat Prevention timer for the route. 3 LD 97 – Configure the five XFALC timers to support downloading.
PAGE 845
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Software Support Enhancements Page 1803 of 3156 LD 16 – Configure the Autoguard Repeat Prevention timer for the route. Prompt Response Description RDB Route Data Block. CNTL YES Responding YES to this prompt will display the TIMR prompt below. TIMR ARP 1-(3)-255 Autoguard Repeat Prevention timer. REQ TYPE ... For Australia, the recommended value of ARP is 200 seconds. LD 97 – Configure the five XFALC timers to support downloading.
PAGE 846
Page 1804 of 3156 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Software Support Enhancements Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 847
Page 1805 of 3156 Intercept Computer Dial from Directory Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1805 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-dial Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 848
Page 1806 of 3156 Intercept Computer Dial from Directory With the Intercept Computer Dial from Directory feature (ICPD), the attendant does not need to dial the DN from the Attendant Console; pressing a single key on the ICT keyboard connects the call to the DN, thereby saving the attendant time. An ICP can be programmed with a directory of the internal Directory Numbers (DNs) in the system.
PAGE 849
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory Page 1807 of 3156 Attendant Busy Verify It is possible for an attendant to Busy Verify in the following manner: • Press an idle loop key, and press the Busy Verify key on the Attendant Console, and • Dial an extension DN from the ICT. Pre-dial Break-in It is possible for an attendant to override call forward on a set in the following manner: • Press an idle loop key, and press the Break-in key on the Attendant Console. • Dial an extension DN from the ICT.
PAGE 850
Page 1808 of 3156 Intercept Computer Dial from Directory Post-dial Operation Attendant Break-in An attendant can break-in to a call by: • Dialing an extension DN from the ICT. • Pressing the Break-in key on the Attendant Console. Automatic Wake-up This feature can be requested as follows: • Press the Wake-up key on the Attendant Console. • Dial a DN from the ICT. • Dial an octothorpe sign “#”, and terminate by dialing the requested wakeup time from the Attendant Console.
PAGE 851
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory Page 1809 of 3156 Autodial It is possible to press the Autodial (ADL) key (in which some digits are stored such as an Electronic Switched Network (ESN) code or Flexible Feature Code (FCC)), and then dial a DN from the ICP. The DN will then be stored on the ADL key.
PAGE 852
Page 1810 of 3156 Intercept Computer Dial from Directory To override Do Not Disturb for an extension DN: • Press an idle Loop key on the Attendant Console. • Dial a DN from the ICT. • Press the DND IND key on the Attendant Console. Message Waiting Indication To activate the message waiting lamp: • Press the Loop key and the Message Indication (MSG INDIC) key on the Attendant Console. • Dial the set’s DN from the ICT.
PAGE 853
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory Page 1811 of 3156 Transfer to Attendant If a set transfers a call to the attendant, and the transferring party has not yet completed the transfer before the attendant has answered, dialing from the ICP is ignored (the transferred party is connected to SRC, and the transferring party is connected to DEST due to the Attendant Recall with Splitting feature). Feature packaging This feature is packaged under the Intercept Computer Interface (ICP) package 143.
PAGE 854
Page 1812 of 3156 Intercept Computer Dial from Directory Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 15 – Allow or deny an intercept attendant to dial an extension DN from the Intercept Computer Terminal. 2 LD 15 – Set the minimum and maximum switchhook flash time required when using package 131. 3 LD 21 – Print Intercept Computer Dial from directory system information.
PAGE 855
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory Page 1813 of 3156 LD 15 – Set the minimum and maximum switchhook flash time required when using package 131. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG New, or change. TYPE: TIM Timers data block. xxx yyy Switch Hook Flash timer. ... - FLSH LD 21 – Print Intercept Computer Dial from directory system information. Prompt Response Description REQ PRT Print. TYPE CDB Customer data block. ICPD (0)-9 ICP Padding digit.
PAGE 856
Page 1814 of 3156 Intercept Computer Dial from Directory ICTD = YES operation examples Attendant Console is Idle The Attendant Console is idle, all lamps are dark, the display is blank, and the Release key is lit. On the ICT the attendant types the name of the called party. The ICP database is scanned to get information about this person. The information, including extension DN 4004, is then displayed on the screen.
PAGE 857
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory Page 1815 of 3156 Attendant has Call on Hold The attendant is talking to SRC (DN 4002) and DEST (DN 4004) on loop “0”, and then puts the call on hold by pressing another Loop key, or by pressing the hold key and an idle Loop key. Loop lamp “0” is now winking; the new loop key is lit. The display is cleared. From the ICT the attendant has typed the name of the party to be called. The ICP database is scanned to get information about this party.
PAGE 858
Page 1816 of 3156 Intercept Computer Dial from Directory Attendant is Connected to DID/CO on SRC DID/CO Releases before Dialing from ICT The attendant is talking with the SRC party (a DID/CO trunk); Route access code, Route member, and ATDN are displayed, Loop key “0” is lit, SRC lamp is lit, and DEST lamp is dark. The SRC wants to be extended to party A. On the ICT the attendant types the name of party A. The ICP database is scanned to get information about this person.
PAGE 859
Page 1817 of 3156 Intercept Computer Enhancements Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 860
Page 1818 of 3156 Intercept Computer Enhancements Operating parameters Analog (500/2500 type) telephones can be used as Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agent sets. The answering machine must have a 2500-type set interface to the Meridian 1. Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software.
PAGE 861
Intercept Computer Enhancements Page 1819 of 3156 LD 10 – Configure Intercept Computer Answering Machine Class of Service. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: 500 500/2500 telephone data block. (IAMD) IAMA ICP Answering Machine (denied) allowed. ... CLS Allow a 2500 set to be a channel in the ICP Answering Machine. LD 15 – Configure internal and external call DNs for Intercept Transfer. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add, or change.
PAGE 862
Page 1820 of 3156 Intercept Computer Enhancements LD 93 – Configure internal and external call DNs for Attendant console groups. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE a...a Type of data block (a...a = ACG, CPG, CPGP, RACC, RACG, RCPG, TACC, TACG, TCPG, TENS, or TGEN). xxxx External Call DN. ... - ECDN DN used for intercept transfer when the FDN and multitenant are not on intercept position. The DN is used for intercept treatment for external calls.
PAGE 863
Page 1821 of 3156 Intercept Computer Interface Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1821 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 864
Page 1822 of 3156 Intercept Computer Interface Figure 52 Intercept Computer Interface components Tenant Set Meridian 1 Intercept Computer Serial Data Interface Tenant Set Interrogation Set Intercept Position Set or Attendant Console Printer Terminal Printer 553-7864.EPS • From the ICP terminal. • Automatically when a terminal number (TN) is disabled or enabled by a maintenance overlay program.
PAGE 865
Intercept Computer Interface Page 1823 of 3156 A multiple channel answering machine can be connected to both the Meridian 1 and Intercept Computer. The machine is defined in the Meridian 1 as a Group Hunt list, and the Pilot Directory Number (PLDN) is used to terminate on the Answering Machine after a call has been diverted by the ICP feature. A 2500-type set may be designated as a channel in the ICP answering machine in LD 10. The set must have a Digitone (DTN) Class of Service.
PAGE 866
Page 1824 of 3156 Intercept Computer Interface Digital Private Network Signaling System (DPNSS1)/Digital Access Signaling System (DASS2) Uniform Dialing Plan (UDP) Interworking The Intercept Computer Interface feature is not supported in a DPNSS1 UDP network. Feature packaging Intercept Computer Interface (ICP) package 143.
PAGE 867
Intercept Computer Interface Page 1825 of 3156 6 LD 23 – Modify the ACD/Message Center parameters for Incoming Call Indicators (ICIs). 7 LD 93 – Enable or modify the Multi-tenant Service feature. LD 17 – Configure the configuration record for Intercept Computer Interface. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE CFN Configuration data block. IOTB (NO) YES Change to logical units. ADAN NEW TTY x Add TTY number x.
PAGE 868
Page 1826 of 3156 Intercept Computer Interface LD 10 – Create or modify the analog (500/2500 type) telephone data block for Intercept Computer Interface. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW, CHG Add, or change. TYPE: 500 500/2500Telephone data block. (IRGD) IRGA Interrogation set for Intercept Computer allowed (denied). (IAMD) IAMA Allow a 2500-type set to be a channel in the ICP Answering Machine (CLS DTN is required). 0-NIPN Terminal/printer number (NIPN configured in LD 15). ...
PAGE 869
Intercept Computer Interface Page 1827 of 3156 ICP (NO) YES Intercept Computer (is not) is available. ICT 0-NIPN Terminal/printer number (NIPN configured in LD 15). LD 23 – Modify the ACD/Message Center parameters for Incoming Call Indicators (ICIs). Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE ACD ACD data block. (NO) YES ACD MC (is not) is an intercept position. ... ICP ICPS Intercept Computer printer search. COM Common printer for ACD group. (CIR) Circular hunt.
PAGE 870
Page 1828 of 3156 Intercept Computer Interface Feature operation A terminal at the ICP displays a message stating why the tenant at the DN is absent. The person at the ICP can then store the caller's message for the tenant's DN and activate the message waiting LED at the tenant's telephone. The tenant at the DN retrieves the stored caller messages by calling the ICP, where the messages are displayed on the terminal (or optionally printed). 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 871
Page 1829 of 3156 Intercept Treatment Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1829 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1830 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1831 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 872
Page 1830 of 3156 Intercept Treatment Operating parameters When Intercept to RAN is desired, a recording device is required. A Recorded Announcement (RAN) route and at least one trunk must be defined (see the RAN feature module). Intercept Treatment (INTR) for these types of calls can be specified in the Customer Data Block (LD 15) for the situations listed in Table 68. Table 68 Intercept Treatment for various types of calls.
PAGE 873
Intercept Treatment Page 1831 of 3156 Feature interactions Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection (BARS/NARS) Table 69 specifies the type of Intercept Treatments (INTR) available for BARS/NARS calls, and lists the intercept situations that are possible.
PAGE 874
Page 1832 of 3156 Intercept Treatment Flexible Feature Codes If Intercept Treatment has been specified for a call to a vacant number (CTVN), the Digit Display (DDs) on the Attendant Console is affected by Flexible Feature Codes (FFCs). If no FFC has been defined, the dialed digits are displayed up to and including the first digit that fails to match any Directory Number (DN).
PAGE 875
Intercept Treatment Page 1833 of 3156 Virtual Network Services Intercept treatment applied to Virtual Network Service calls is configured as for TIE trunks. Feature packaging This feature requires Intercept Treatment (INTR) package 11. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 15 – Change customer’s Intercept Treatment for various call types. LD 15 – Change customer’s Intercept Treatment for various call types. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change.
PAGE 876
Page 1834 of 3156 Intercept Treatment - NINV (OVF OVF OVF ATN) Default Intercept Treatment for BARS/NARS invalid calls. - NITR (OVF OVF OVF ATN) Default Intercept Treatment for BARS/NARS invalid translation calls. - NRES (OVF OVF OVF ATN) Default Intercept Treatment for BARS/NARS restricted calls. - NBLK (OVF OVF OVF ATN) Default Intercept Treatment for BARS/NARS blocked calls. - - RANR 0-511 RAN route number for intercepted calls.
PAGE 877
Page 1835 of 3156 Intercept Treatment Enhancements Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MFC Call to Vacant Office Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MFC Call to Vacant Number Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MFC Congestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835 1835 1836 1836 Operating parameters . .
PAGE 878
Page 1836 of 3156 Intercept Treatment Enhancements MFC Call to Vacant Number Code This treatment is used when a VACC level 2 signal is received from the far end. MFC Congestion This treatment is used when a CONG level 1 or 2 signal is received from the far end. Operating parameters There are no operating parameters associated with this feature. Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131.
PAGE 879
Intercept Treatment Enhancements Page 1837 of 3156 LD 15 – Modify the Customer Data Block. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add, or change. TYPE: INT Intercept Treatments data block. OVF ATN RAN NAP BSY SRC1...SRC8 MFC Call to Vacant Office. Four entries are required; Default = OVF, OVF, OVF, ATN. ... - MFVO Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 880
Page 1838 of 3156 553-3001-306 Intercept Treatment Enhancements Standard 10.
PAGE 881
Page 1839 of 3156 International Meridian 1 Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1839 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1840 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1841 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 882
Page 1840 of 3156 International Meridian 1 Superloop provides an increase in traffic capacity by implementing 120 time slots for each Extended Network (XNET) Card, combining loops into groups of four, and sharing resources across the four loops. Each Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller can support between one half and four Superloops, regardless of combination, in XNET Card to DS-30X loop configurations.
PAGE 883
International Meridian 1 Page 1841 of 3156 The following features are not supported on Meridian 1 equipment: • Alternative Loss Plan • Automatic Guard Detection • Active Feature Dial Tone • Audible Alarm • Malicious Call Trace Enhancement • Off-hook Tone • Operator Call Back • Dial Tone Detection • Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Outward Dialing (DOD) Interface • Enhanced Night Service • Loop-start Supervisory Trunks • LOGIVOX Telephones • Malicious Call Trace Idle • MFE
PAGE 884
Page 1842 of 3156 International Meridian 1 Meridian 1 supports the configuration of the minimum/maximum flash timing on a system basis only (non-Meridian 1 configuration could be done on a customer basis). Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 17 – Configure the configuration record for 16-Button Dual-tone Multifrequency (DTMF) detection.
PAGE 885
International Meridian 1 Page 1843 of 3156 TN Iscu cu Terminal Number Option 11C POLR a...a Polarity of LED messages for DTD (a...a = (NORM) or REV) XTDT (0)-7 Extended Tone Detector Table number. -DTO (NO) YES Dial Tone Detection Only. CDEN a...a Card Density (aa = SD, DD, or 4D) TOTN Iscu cu To Terminal Number Option 11C LD 97 – Configure system parameters for peripheral equipment in configuration record 2. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change.
PAGE 886
Page 1844 of 3156 International Meridian 1 Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 887
1860 Page 1845 of 3156 Inventory Reporting Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate Inventory files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Midnight Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Inventory files . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inventory Reporting status . .
PAGE 888
Page 1846 of 3156 Inventory Reporting You can use any TTY device that provides access to Overlay 117 to use this feature. The Meridian Administration Tool (MAT), has a graphical user interface that supports the Inventory Reporting feature. For information related to the Inventory Reporting feature and MAT, please refer to the Meridian Administration Tools Maintenance Windows User Guide (June, 1999). Generate Inventory files The system can generate two separate Inventory files.
PAGE 889
Inventory Reporting Page 1847 of 3156 Both Inventory files contain up to 32 bytes of Identification Programmable Read-Only Memory (ID PROM) information for each inventoried card or telephone that is physically present. The 32 bytes are actually 32 ASCII characters representing different data elements. See Table 71 for more information.
PAGE 890
Page 1848 of 3156 Inventory Reporting See Table 72 for an example. Table 72 Card inventory example for Option 61C Card inventory: 17 8 1999 11 5 27, 17 8 1999 11 5 40, 15 CP , 0 14, NT9D19CA 03 NNTM1830TVFK CNI , 0 12, NT6D65AA 08 NNTM18304UY9 CMDU, 0 0, NT6D64AB 01 NNTM183227YT CONF , 17, DTR , 004 0 00, NT8S16AB 03 NNTM18310C7D0000000 .... .... .... Note: indicates the ID PROM information is not available because the card is not physically present.
PAGE 891
Inventory Reporting Page 1849 of 3156 See Table 73 for an example. Table 73 Telephone inventory example for Option 11C Set inventory: 17 8 1999 10 42 44, 17 8 1999 10 42 45, 4 2616, 08 01, M2616 NT2K16XC 35 01 69409A, RODNEY, 1000 2006, 08 01, M2006 NT2K05XH 93 10 C10C19, CHRIS , 1100 2008, 08 02, M2008 NT9K08AD 03 03 945272, DEBBIE, 1200 2616, 08 03, M2616 NT2K16XD 35 01 CC9C98, DANNY , 1300 2616, 02 10, , TROY , 5902 .... .... .... .... ....
PAGE 892
Page 1850 of 3156 Inventory Reporting If the system receives an abort request and there is no activity on a file, the request is rejected, and you will receive a "No generation to abort" message. Midnight Routine To schedule Inventory Reporting for the virtual midnight routine, use the commands in Overlay 117. See Table 74 for a list of commands and their descriptions.
PAGE 893
Inventory Reporting Page 1851 of 3156 Table 75 Inventory Reporting print commands Command Description INV PRT Print out the status of the Inventory feature INV PRT ALL Print out both the card and the Telephone Inventory files INV PRT CARDS Print out the Card Inventory file INV PRT SETS Print out the Telephone Inventory file INV PRT STATUS Print out the status of the Inventory feature Features and Services
PAGE 894
Page 1852 of 3156 Inventory Reporting Inventory Reporting status There are two commands that can be used to query the Inventory Reporting feature: • INV PRT • INV PRT STATUS The response to a status query contains two responses, one for the Card Inventory file and another for the Set Inventory file. You only need to make a single request for both files.
PAGE 895
Inventory Reporting Page 1853 of 3156 Operating parameters This feature is compatible with all Meridian 1 systems. When a telephone is installed, but not configured in software, the system has no record of the telephone, and therefore, will not be inventoried. A telephone that is installed, but configured in software as a different type of telephone, may not be included in the inventory file.
PAGE 896
Page 1854 of 3156 Inventory Reporting CP-2 CP68040/64M/32M, Call Processor NT9D19 HA Global CP-2 CP68040/64MB, Call Processor NT9D19 CB Global CP-2 CP68040/96MB, Call Processor NT9D19 HB Global CP-3 CP68060/112MB, Call Processor NT9D10 JA Global CP-3 CP68060/48MB, Call Processor NT9D10 AA Global CP-3 CP68060/64MB, Call Processor NT9D10 CA Global CP-3 CP68060/80MB, Call Processor NT9D10 EA Global CP-3 CP68060/96MB, Call Processor NT9D10 HA Global CP-4 CP4 Call processor
PAGE 897
Inventory Reporting Page 1855 of 3156 EIMC Embedded Intelligent Mobility Controller NT7R01 CA North America EXALCC Analog Line Card NTRA08 AA, AB, BA China EXUTAP-1 Universal Trunk, Busy Tone detect Trunk, 400Hz NTRA26 AA Global EXUTAP-2 Universal Trunk, Busy tone detect Trunk, 425Hz NTRA26 BA Global EXUTC Universal Trunk, Extended NTRA10 AA, AB China EXUTJ Universal Trunk NT8D14 DA Japan EXUTJ Universal Trunk, Extended NT5D15 AA Japan FXNET Fiber Extended Network NTIP
PAGE 898
Page 1856 of 3156 NCE Inventory Reporting 3 Ports CNI NTRB34 AA Global PRI2 2.0 MB PRI NTAK79 BC International PRI2 2.
PAGE 899
Inventory Reporting Page 1857 of 3156 XFALC Analog Line Card, Flexible High Voltage NT5K02 AA, AB, AC, DA, DB, EA, EB, JA, JB, JC, KA, KB, LB, LC, LD, MA, MB, MC, NB, NC, PA, PB, PC, QA, QB, QC, SA, SB, TA, TB Global XFALC Analog Line Card, Flexible High Voltage, Message‘ NT5K96 MA, MB, NB, PB, SA, TA Global XFALCC Analog Line Card, Message Waiting NTRA04 AA Global XFCOT CO Trunk, Extended Flexible PPM NT5K18 AA, AB, BA, BB Global XFCOT CO Trunk, Extended Flexible PPM NT5K61 AA Glo
PAGE 900
Page 1858 of 3156 Inventory Reporting XFEM E & M Tie Trunk, Extended Flexible NT5K83 AA, AB, DA, DB, FA, GA, HA, KA, LA International XFEM E & M Tie Trunk, Extended Flexible, 4 unit NT5K72 AA International XFEM E & M Trunk, Extended Flexible NT5K19 AA, AB, AC International XMFC Extended Multi-Frequency Compelled Sender Receiver NT5K21 AA International XMFR Extended MF Receiver NTAG26 AA International XMLC Message Waiting Line Card NT5D49 AA International XMLC Message Waiting
PAGE 901
Inventory Reporting Page 1859 of 3156 The following card types are not included in the Card Inventory file: • TTY or PC cards • Power Supply • Any non-Nortel Networks (third-party) cards including those designed to simulate included cards. Note: Inventory Reporting features are supported by MAT, version 6.6.
PAGE 902
Page 1860 of 3156 Inventory Reporting The Telephone Inventory file does not include ID PROM information for the following data units: • Data units on: Table 79 Data Units ID PROM information excluded from Set Inventory File • M2006 • M2616 • M3110 • M2008 • M2216 • M3310 • M2016 • M390X • M3820 • Sl-1 data units. • 500/2500 data units. • Other digital data units. Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature.
PAGE 903
Page 1863 of 3156 Italian Central Office Special Services Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1863 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1863 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1864 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 904
Page 1864 of 3156 Italian Central Office Special Services This feature is only allowed for a simple call, and cannot be accessed in consultation state. As a result, if the attendant makes a “1xx” service call on the source side, a call cannot be made on the destination side; therefore, the special service call cannot be extended or transferred. Outgoing digits are outpulsed according to the trunk Class of Service, dial pulse (DIP) or digitone (DTN).
PAGE 905
Italian Central Office Special Services Page 1865 of 3156 Periodic Pulse Metering Periodic Pulse Metering pulses are received from the Central Office according to the charge of the accessed service, and are collected and stored as per normal procedures. Switchhook flash A switchhook flash is ignored while a special “1xx” service is being accessed. 16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Operation The special service FFC is not supported on the ABCD keys of 16-button DTMF sets.
PAGE 906
Page 1866 of 3156 Italian Central Office Special Services LD 57 – Configure the Flexible Feature Code required to access “1xx” special services. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Code data block a...a FFC to be changed 1-4 FFC to access "1xx" special services. ... CODE ... ITXX RTXX The CO route number for the “1xx” special service, prompted only if ITXX has been configured. For NT, RT, XN, and XT SL-1 machines, and Meridian 1 system Options 51, 61, and 71.
PAGE 907
Page 1867 of 3156 Italian Periodic Pulse Metering Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1867 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1868 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1868 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 908
Page 1868 of 3156 Italian Periodic Pulse Metering When the DTI2 card detects that a pulse on the PPM bit (A in Italy) has met all PPM timing requirements, the DTI2 card checks to see if the Italian PPM feature is enabled. If so, the state of the B bit is also checked. At this point, the PPM count will be incremented (in the card) only if the B bit is zero. Using the Italian PPM option, the new card no longer reports the P1UU case as a PPM pulse.
PAGE 909
Italian Periodic Pulse Metering Page 1869 of 3156 Feature packaging This feature is packaged under the existing 2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129. Periodic Pulse Metering/Message Registration (MR) package 101 is required for its operation. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 73 – Configure the Italian PPM option. LD 73 – Configure the Italian PPM option. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE DTI2 2 Mbit digital trunk.
PAGE 910
Page 1870 of 3156 553-3001-306 Italian Periodic Pulse Metering Standard 10.
PAGE 911
Page 1871 of 3156 KD3 Direct Inward Dialing/Direct Outward Dialing for Spain The KD3 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)/Direct Outward Dialing (DOD) for Spain feature is introduced to enable the Meridian 1 to meet the specifications of the Spanish signaling protocol. Prior to the introduction of the KD3 interface, the only Central Office trunk support available in Spain from a Meridian 1 perspective was an analog Central Office Trunk (COT) type of interface (i.e., non Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) or DID/DOD).
PAGE 912
Page 1872 of 3156 553-3001-306 KD3 Direct Inward Dialing/Direct Outward Dialing for Spain Standard 10.
PAGE 913
Page 1873 of 3156 Last Number Redial Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1874 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1874 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 914
Page 1874 of 3156 Last Number Redial Operating parameters When making a call using Last Number Redial (LNR), no digits can be dialed before the stored number except Authorization, Charge Account, or Forced Charge Account codes. However, additional digits can follow the outpulsed LNR number. The M3000 and the M2317 telephones have LNR as a local telephone (firmware) feature instead of as a system feature.
PAGE 915
Last Number Redial Page 1875 of 3156 Autodial Tandem Transfer Normally, when the ADL key is pressed during the dialing stage, the ADL number will replace the Last Number Redial number. In the ATX feature, however, when the ADL key is used during the established stage, the ADL digits will not substitute the Last Number Redial number. Automatic Redial An Automatic Redial (ARDL) call can be activated on a number dialed using the Last Number Redial (LNK) key or by pressing the DN key twice.
PAGE 916
Page 1876 of 3156 Last Number Redial Calling Party Privacy The Last Number Redial (LNR) feature will set a Calling Party Privacy (CPP) flag in the LNR data space if the CPP was included in the last number dialed by the user. Any subsequent outgoing redialed call will send the Privacy Indicator to the far end. Enhanced Flexible Feature Codes - Outgoing Call Barring Barred DNs will be stored by Last Number Redial (LNR). DNs redialed using LNR are checked against the active OCB level.
PAGE 917
Last Number Redial Page 1877 of 3156 Off-Hook Alarm Security Off-Hook Alarm Security treatment may apply to these features if the ASTM expires. Speed Call A number dialed using Speed Call will become the LNR number on all telephones, except the M2317 and M3000. Speed Call, System A number dialed using a System Speed Call key becomes the Last Number Redial number on all telephones, except the M2317 and M3000.
PAGE 918
Page 1878 of 3156 Last Number Redial LD 15 – Enable or disable LNR for a customer. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: FTR Features and options data block. CUST 0-99 Customer number. - OPT (LRD) LRA LNR (denied) allowed. LD 10 – Add or change LNR for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: 500 Telephone type. TN lscu Terminal Number. CLS (LND) LNA LNR (denied) allowed. LNRS 4-(16)-31 LNR size.
PAGE 919
Last Number Redial LNRS 4-(16)-31 LNR size. KEY xx LNK LNR key, where, xx = key number. Page 1879 of 3156 Feature operation To automatically redial the last number dialed: • Lift the handset or select a free Directory Number (DN). • Press the Last No. or the DN key again. To automatically redial the last number dialed (analog (500/2500 type) telephones): • Lift the handset. • Dial SPRE+89.
PAGE 920
Page 1880 of 3156 553-3001-306 Last Number Redial Standard 10.
PAGE 921
Page 1881 of 3156 Limited Access to Overlays Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1881 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 922
Page 1882 of 3156 Limited Access to Overlays • Access to Print Routine Overlay 20 may or may not include access to the Speed Call lists.
PAGE 923
Limited Access to Overlays • leftwise unique, and • different from existing passwords. Page 1883 of 3156 For example, acceptable passwords can include: • JSMITH • 0001 • 2GUEST, and • TECHNICIAN. System administrators using PWD1 and PWD2 in Overlay 17 define access to Overlays with this feature. They may also define certain command use levels within a given Overlay. For instance, the administrator can specify print only access in the Configuration record (Overlay 17).
PAGE 924
Page 1884 of 3156 Limited Access to Overlays Figure 53 Example of Audit Trail printout (Overlay 22) DAT 01/02 LOG 08:01 #03 10 11 LOG 09:32 #04 15 10 14 15 LOG 11:21 #99 12 LOG 16:35 PWD2 15 21 57 22 11 15 21 17 Only system administrators, logged in using PWD1 or PWD2, can access the Audit Trail from Overlay 22. Administrators can change the size of the Audit Trail buffer, which can be from 50 to 1000 words (divisible by 50).
PAGE 925
Limited Access to Overlays Page 1885 of 3156 • TTY users are not permitted to login using a Set-Based Administration password. • Administration sets and User sets are not permitted to login using overlay access passwords. The total number of LAPW passwords allowed, including overlay access and Set-Based Administration access, is 100.
PAGE 926
Page 1886 of 3156 Limited Access to Overlays Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 17 – Define LAPW options and passwords. 2 LD 17 – Change user’s LAPW password (user must log in using current LAPW). 3 LD 22 – Check options available for LAPW passwords (administrator). 4 LD 22 – Print options for LAPW password (user). 5 LD 22 – Print contents of Audit Trail buffer (allowed if using PWD1 or PWD2).
PAGE 927
Limited Access to Overlays Page 1887 of 3156 - - TEN xxx xxx . . . xxx, ALL (XALL) Tenant list for the above customer for password access. XALL removes tenant access for this password. - - HOST (NO) YES Host mode. - - OPT aaaa (CFPA) CFPD (LLCD), LLCA (PROD) PROA (PSCA) PSCD Password Options allowed. Changes to all LD 17 prompts (allowed) denied. Line Load Control commands (denied) allowed. Print Only Class of Service (denied) allowed. Printing Speed Call lists (allowed) denied.
PAGE 928
Page 1888 of 3156 Limited Access to Overlays LD 22 – Check options available for LAPW passwords (administrator). Prompt Response Description REQ PWD Lookup password options. PWD2 xxxx Level 2 master password. Note: LAPW password options are output to the active TTY only. Options format is shown below: FLTH x Failed logon attempt Threshold. LOCK xx Lock-out time in minutes. AUDT aaa Audit Trail allowed (denied). SIZE xxxx Word size stored in the Audit Trail buffer.
PAGE 929
Limited Access to Overlays Page 1889 of 3156 LD 22 – Print contents of Audit Trail buffer (allowed if using PWD1 or PWD2). Prompt Response Description REQ PRT Print. TYPE AUDT Audit Trail. Feature operation To bypass a specific restriction imposed by the Limited Access to Overlays feature, enter the appropriate password as defined in Overlay 17.
PAGE 930
Page 1890 of 3156 553-3001-306 Limited Access to Overlays Standard 10.
PAGE 931
Page 1891 of 3156 Limited Access to Overlays Password Enhancement Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1891 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 932
Page 1892 of 3156 Limited Access to Overlays Password Enhancement Operating parameters Overlays 24 and 88 on all machines have their own passwords. These passwords are unaffected by the Limited Access to Overlay feature. Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging Limited Access to Overlays (LAPW) is packaged under package 164.
PAGE 933
Limited Access to Overlays Password Enhancement Page 1893 of 3156 - - PWnn xxx...x Current LAPW password for password nn. - - OVLA xx xx ... xx ALL (XALL) Overlays (02-99) accessible with PWnn. - - CUST 0-99 ALL (XALL) Customers who can access overlays with password PWnn. - - TEN xx xx ... xx ALL (XALL) Tenant list for password access. - - HOST (NO) YES Enable HOST mode log-in for PWnn.
PAGE 934
Page 1894 of 3156 553-3001-306 Limited Access to Overlays Password Enhancement Standard 10.
PAGE 935
Page 1895 of 3156 Line and Trunk Cards Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitone Receivers (DTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Cards . . . . . . .
PAGE 936
Page 1896 of 3156 Line and Trunk Cards • 500/2500 Telephone Line Card — QPC594 (4d) (16 ports per card) — QPC452 (dd) (eight ports per card) — QPC60 (sd) (four ports per card) • Message Waiting Line Card — NT8D09AA Analog Message Waiting (16 analog single-line telephones with Message Waiting lamps) — QPC789 (4d) (16 ports per card) — QPC494 (dd) (eight ports per card) — QPC267 (sd) (four ports per card) • SL-1 Telephone Line Card — QPC451 (dd) (eight ports per card) — QPC61 (sd) (four ports per card)
PAGE 937
Line and Trunk Cards Page 1897 of 3156 Trunk Cards Trunk Cards provide the interface between the Meridian 1 and all trunk facilities, including not only public and private network trunks (CO, TIE), but those that connect the Meridian 1 to special features (Recorded Announcement, Paging, and so forth).
PAGE 938
Page 1898 of 3156 553-3001-306 Line and Trunk Cards Standard 10.
PAGE 939
Page 1899 of 3156 Line Load Control Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 940
Page 1900 of 3156 Line Load Control The selection of controlled stations is based on the Class of Service of the station or trunk. There are four Class of Service options for LLC: • • • • LLC N LLC 1 LLC 2 LLC 3 No LLC First LLC Class of Service Second LLC Class of Service Third LLC Class of Service The control levels are enabled manually through LD entry and operate in a hierarchical manner. Only one control level can be active at a time.
PAGE 941
Line Load Control Page 1901 of 3156 Figure 54 LLC, system control levels (hierarchy and overlap of operative levels) Station Class of Service LLCN LLC1 T S LLC2 LLC3 LLC1, LLC2, and LLC3 Stations immune to LCC LLC1 and LLC2 F LLC1 No control No control No control No control (LLC off) OFF 553-4024.EPS Operating parameters The following services are not subject to LLC: • Attendant stations • Direct Inward System Access (DISA), and • Hot Line services.
PAGE 942
Page 1902 of 3156 Line Load Control Feature packaging Line Load Control (LLC) package 105 must be enabled for this feature to operate. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 10 – Add or change Line Load Control for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. 2 LD 11 – Add or change Line Load Control for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. 3 LD 2 – Set Line Load Control levels.
PAGE 943
Line Load Control TN lscu Terminal Number. CLS (LLCN) LLC1 LLC2 LLC3 LLC LLC LLC LLC Page 1903 of 3156 not enabled (the default). class 1. class 2. class 3. LD 2 – Set Line Load Control levels. Prompt Response Description SCTL x aaa Set blocking probability. x = F (LLC, level F). S (LLC, level S). T (LLC, level T). aaa = 0-100. SLLC x Activate LLC at level x. x = F (LLC, level F). S (LLC, level S). T (LLC, level T).
PAGE 944
Page 1904 of 3156 553-3001-306 Line Load Control Standard 10.
PAGE 945
Page 1905 of 3156 Line Lockout Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 946
Page 1906 of 3156 Line Lockout Flexible Line Lockout-This feature provides three options for lockout treatment for stations and DISA calls. Flexible Line Lockout can perform any of the following functions: • provide the existing overflow tone and then lockout treatment • immediately intercept calls to the attendant, or • receive overflow tone and then intercept to the attendant.
PAGE 947
Line Lockout Page 1907 of 3156 Call Detail Recording If a Direct Inward System Access (DISA) call routes to the attendant due to Flexible Line Lockout, and Call Detail Recording (CDR) is selected for incoming trunk calls, a call record generates when the attendant terminates the call after answer. The CDR record shows the attendant number and the route and member numbers. If the attendant extends the call, the CDR record generates when the call is terminated.
PAGE 948
Page 1908 of 3156 Line Lockout System Overflow Tone If the option for Flexible Line Lockout to the attendant is enabled, any call that is given overflow tone (e.g., if the wrong access code is dialed, or if the telephone is not allowed to dial the Trunk Access code) is intercepted to the attendant on overflow timeout. Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 system software.
PAGE 949
Line Lockout Page 1909 of 3156 - DIND 2-(30)-60 Dial tone and interdigit timeout for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, and 500 telephones. - DIDT 2-(14)-60 Dial tone and interdigit timeout for 2500 telephones. - BOTO 2-(14)-60 Busy tone and overflow tone timeout for all telephones. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 950
Page 1910 of 3156 553-3001-306 Line Lockout Standard 10.
PAGE 951
Page 1911 of 3156 Listed Directory Numbers Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1911 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1911 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1912 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 952
Page 1912 of 3156 Listed Directory Numbers Feature interactions Call Forward No Answer A Listed Directory Number (LDN) that is assigned to an Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) has a higher priority than a Call Forward No Answer ICI. When a call is forwarded to an LDN via Flexible DN, the call is presented on an LDN ICI. Call Party Name Display Call Party Name Display (CPDN) is not supported for LDNs. If the LDN call is from an incoming trunk route, the CPND assigned to the route access code is displayed.
PAGE 953
Listed Directory Numbers Page 1913 of 3156 LD 15 – Assign Listed Directory Numbers for each customer. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: LDN Gate opener. CUST 0-99 Customer Number. - LDN0 xxx...x LDN0. - LDN1 xxx...x LDN1. - LDN2 xxx...x LDN2. - LDN3 xxx...x LDN3. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 954
Page 1914 of 3156 553-3001-306 Listed Directory Numbers Standard 10.
PAGE 955
Page 1915 of 3156 Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1915 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1915 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1916 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 956
Page 1916 of 3156 Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide The LDNs to be used network wide cannot be used in conjunction with Distant Steering Codes. Feature interactions Call Forward No Answer With this feature, the LDN ICI has a higher priority than CFNA ICI. When a call is forwarded to an LDN via Flexible DN, the call will be presented on the LDN ICI. Centralized Attendant Service Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) is mutually exclusive to the NAS package.
PAGE 957
Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide Page 1917 of 3156 Network Attendant Service The way the network LDN calls are presented in a NAS environment is changed by this feature. The presentation on the NDID, NTIE, NCO, NFEX or NWAT, and the LDN0 key is changed to the correct LDN key, if it exists. Otherwise, it will be presented as it previously was on the NDID or LDN0 key. Network Message Center With this feature, the LDN ICI has a higher priority than MWC ICI.
PAGE 958
Page 1918 of 3156 Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide LD 15 – Four prompts define the extended LDN numbers and the Listed Attendants (LDAs) belonging to the LDNs. The prompts can be answered in the same way as the prompts LDN0, 1, 2, 3. The LDA prompts only appear if DLDN is set to YES. These store the Attendant Console number associated with the LDN number. Activate Network Wide LDN in CDB. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data.
PAGE 959
Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide TYPE: Page 1919 of 3156 CDB LDN Customer Data Block. Departmental Listed Directory Numbers. - ICI x LD4 Listed DN 4, where x is the key number. - ICI x LD5 Listed DN 5, where x is the key number. ... LD 93 – Add or change LDN keys in CPG. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE CPGP Changes affect the Console Presentation Group parameters. CUST x Customer number. CPG x CPG number.
PAGE 960
Page 1920 of 3156 Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide Note: The feature option in the origination and terminating node is turned on. 553-3001-306 1 If an LDN key exists corresponding to the dialed DN, the call is presented on this LDN ICI key. 2 If no LDN key corresponding to the dialed DN exists, and an ICI key for the trunk type exists, the call is presented on a matching trunk type key. 3 If neither of the above cases exists, the call is presented to LDN key 0.
PAGE 961
Page 1921 of 3156 Lockout, DID Second Degree Busy, and MFE Signaling Treatments Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 962
Page 1922 of 3156 Lockout, DID Second Degree Busy, and MFE Signaling Treatments • Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls to a telephone set in Second Degree Busy (i.e., a set that is busy on a call, and has another call waiting or camped-on) state are either disconnected, receive busy tone, or routed to the attendant.
PAGE 963
Lockout, DID Second Degree Busy, and MFE Signaling Treatments Page 1923 of 3156 Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 15 – Define an option for DID calls to a second degree busy telephone, and define a new intercept treatment for calls in a lockout state. LD 15 – Define an option for DID calls to a second degree busy telephone, and define a new intercept treatment for calls in a lockout state. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add new data.
PAGE 964
Page 1924 of 3156 553-3001-306 Lockout, DID Second Degree Busy, and MFE Signaling Treatments Standard 10.
PAGE 965
Page 1925 of 3156 LOGIVOX Telephone Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1925 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1925 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1926 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 966
Page 1926 of 3156 LOGIVOX Telephone The LVXA Class of Service cannot be defined or changed through Attendant Console overlay 12. In addition, LXVA Class of Service telephones cannot be tested through overlay 31. A telephone assigned LXVA Class of Service cannot be a maintenance set. The LVXA Class of Service should only be given to a LOGIVOX telephone.
PAGE 967
LOGIVOX Telephone Page 1927 of 3156 LD 11 – Modify the system hardware and software parameters to allow logivox Class of Service: Prompt Response Description ... CLS Class of Service. (NDD) ADD DDS No Digit Display. Automatic Digit Display. Digit Display Standard. (LVXD), LVXA LOGIVOX Class of Service (denied) allowed. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 968
Page 1928 of 3156 553-3001-306 LOGIVOX Telephone Standard 10.
PAGE 969
Page 1929 of 3156 Loop Start Supervisory Trunks Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toll Definition Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answer Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 970
Page 1930 of 3156 Loop Start Supervisory Trunks Toll Definition Coincident The toll definition allows any digit dialed as the first digit after the trunk access code to define the call as a toll call (refer to LD 16). Answer Supervision An answer supervision signal received from the PSTN indicates the call is established for the purpose of other features such as Call Detail Recording (CDR) with answer supervision.
PAGE 971
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks Page 1931 of 3156 China – Busy Tone Detection The interaction with Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) trunks occurs because Busy Tone Supervision (BTS) can be configured in conjunction with any existing supervision type. For the EXUT, BTS can now be configured with a supervision type of BST (both incoming and outgoing battery reversal) and Polarity Insensitive (PIP).
PAGE 972
Page 1932 of 3156 Loop Start Supervisory Trunks LD 14 – Create or modify trunk data blocks on a per trunk basis: Prompt Response Description SIGL LOP Loop start supervision. SUPN YES (NO) Trunk Supervision required (not required). STYP PSP (PIP) Polarity sensitive packs. Polarity insensitive packs. ... LD 16 – Create or modify trunk route data blocks: Prompt Response Description (YES) NO North American toll scheme (a toll call has 0 or 1 as first digit after the trunk access code). ...
PAGE 973
Page 1933 of 3156 Loop Start Supervisory Trunks (Incoming Calls) Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1933 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1934 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1934 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 974
Page 1934 of 3156 Loop Start Supervisory Trunks (Incoming Calls) Operating parameters The Central Office cannot disconnect until one second after it is answered by an attendant or station. This feature is not compatible with the Japan Trunk feature, on a trunk basis. Polarity detection is disabled during outpulsing. Therefore, polarity state changes of less than 200 milliseconds are ignored after trunk seizure, as are power interruptions of unlimited duration.
PAGE 975
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks (Incoming Calls) Page 1935 of 3156 Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 14 – Create or modify trunk data blocks on a per trunk basis. LD 14 – Create or modify trunk data blocks on a per trunk basis. Prompt Response Description SIGL LOP Loop start supervision. Prior to Release 20.0x program the following: CLS Class of Service (LNT) BST Loop start Non-supervised Trunk.
PAGE 976
Page 1936 of 3156 553-3001-306 Loop Start Supervisory Trunks (Incoming Calls) Standard 10.
PAGE 977
Page 1937 of 3156 Loopback on Public Exchange/ Central Office Trunks Contents Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 978
Page 1938 of 3156 Loopback on Public Exchange/ Central Office Trunks This enhancement does not apply to Direct Inward Dialing (DID)/Direct Outward Dialing (DOD) trunks. Feature packaging This feature requires French Type Approval (FRTA) package 197. Feature implementation There are no specific implementation procedures for this feature. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 979
Page 1939 of 3156 M2312 Digit Display Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1940 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 980
Page 1940 of 3156 M2312 Digit Display Feature interactions Call Party Name Display The calling party number can be displayed only when the call is active. Hold The digit display will go blank when a call is placed on hold. Mute Muting a call will not affect the digit display.
PAGE 981
M2312 Digit Display Page 1941 of 3156 Feature operation The first line will be capable of displaying the same characters as the SL-1 telephone's digit display. The second line will display the date and time. In addition, when a call is active on key 0, a call timer will be displayed on the second line.
PAGE 982
Page 1942 of 3156 553-3001-306 M2312 Digit Display Standard 10.
PAGE 983
Page 1943 of 3156 Make Set Busy Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943 Make Set Busy Flexible Feature Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944 Feature packaging . . . .
PAGE 984
Page 1944 of 3156 Make Set Busy Make Set Busy Flexible Feature Codes You can activate Make Set Busy from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone by dialing the Make Set Busy Activate (MSBA) FFC (defined in LD 57). To deactivate Make Set Busy, the user dials the Make Set Busy Deactivate (MSBD) FFC (defined in LD 57) or the general Deactivate (DEAF) FFC (also defined in LD 57). Operating parameters Make Set Busy does not affect incoming Private Line calls.
PAGE 985
Make Set Busy Page 1945 of 3156 If the AOP DN is a Multiple Appearance, Single Call arrangement and MSB is activated, the AOP DN of that telephone will flash, but the telephone will not ring (the call can still be answered from that appearance). Automatic Call Distribution See Automatic Call Distribution: Feature Description (553-2671-110) for information on MSB operations. Automatic Set Relocation If Make Set Busy is active when the telephone is relocated, Make Set Busy remains active.
PAGE 986
Page 1946 of 3156 Make Set Busy Digital Private Signaling System #1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion Executive Intrusion is not allowed if either of these features is active at the requested party. Flexible Feature Code enhancement The Deactivate FFC can be used to deactivate Make Set Busy. Group Call A Group Call to a telephone in Make Set Busy or Individual Do Not Disturb mode cannot be completed. The telephone will not be rung and is not counted as part of the Group Call (i.e.
PAGE 987
Make Set Busy Page 1947 of 3156 Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override This feature allows an incoming voice call to override the Make Set Busy feature activated on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, and to terminate on the telephone. The telephone is given a two-second burst of ringing tone before the call connection is established. All other incoming call types remain blocked by Make Set Busy.
PAGE 988
Page 1948 of 3156 Make Set Busy Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 11 – Add or change MSB for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. LD 11 – Add or change MSB for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu Terminal Number. KEY xx MSB Add an MSB key (must be key 30 for M3000 telephones). xx = key number.
PAGE 989
Page 1949 of 3156 Make Set Busy Improvement Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 990
Page 1950 of 3156 Make Set Busy Improvement The MSBI feature is configured as a new Class Of Service, Make Set Busy Improvement Allowed (MSIA) or Make Set Busy Improvement Denied (MSID). The MSBI feature is configured on a specific Terminal Number (TN) and affects the Single Call Non-Ringing (SCN), Multiple Call NonRinging (MCN) and the Private Line Non-Ringing (PVN) keys on that specific TN. Operating parameters This feature can be used on Meridian 1 proprietary sets with DN key type SCN, MCN or PVN.
PAGE 991
Make Set Busy Improvement Page 1951 of 3156 Ringing Change Key If Single Call Ringing (SCR) or Multiple Call Ringing (MCR) is changed to non-ringing by Ringing Change Key (RCK) and all ringing sets have MSB active, the sets ring immediately. If MSB is not active on all ringing sets, the lamp flashes on the non-ringing SCR or MCR. If the SCN or the MCN key is changed from non-ringing to ringing, SCN and MCN lines are rung immediately.
PAGE 992
Page 1952 of 3156 Make Set Busy Improvement LD 11 – Activate the MSBI feature and define Primary DN set (boss) with non-ringing DN key. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. aaaa Set type. Where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TYPE: TN lscu cu ... ... CLS MSIA ... ... KEY xx SCN yyyy xx MCN yyyy xx PVN yyyy ... 553-3001-306 Terminal Number. l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit for Options 51C-81C.
PAGE 993
Make Set Busy Improvement Page 1953 of 3156 LD 11 – Define another set (secretary) with ringing DN key and MSB key. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE: aaaa Set type. Where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu cu ... ... KEY xx xx xx xx ... Terminal Number. l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit for Options 51C-81C. c = card, u = unit for Option 11C.
PAGE 994
Page 1954 of 3156 553-3001-306 Make Set Busy Improvement Standard 10.
PAGE 995
Page 1955 of 3156 Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1956 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 996
Page 1956 of 3156 Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override Feature interactions Do Not Disturb Voice calls are not allowed on a set with attendant-activated Do Not Disturb. Make Set Busy This feature allows an incoming voice call to override the Make Set Busy feature activated on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, and to terminate on the telephone. The telephone is given a two-second burst of ringing tone before the call connection is established.
PAGE 997
Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override Page 1957 of 3156 Feature operation The following example illustrates how a voice call can be made to a set with MSB active: In this example, Set A is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone with a VCC key programmed with the DN of a single appearance key on set B. Set B is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone with a single appearance DN key. Set B has a Make Set Busy key which has been activated. 1 A goes off-hook, and receives dial tone.
PAGE 998
Page 1958 of 3156 553-3001-306 Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override Standard 10.
PAGE 999
Page 1959 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Malicious Call Trace (EMCT) . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Malicious Call Trace for Saudi Arabia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Malicious Call Trace for Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trace Number (TRC) Key Lamp Status . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1000
Page 1960 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace If the initiator hears overflow tone, the call trace has failed for one of the following reasons: • The station does not have Malicious Call Trace Allowed (MCTA) Class of Service (CLS) • The station is not established on an active call, or • The system could not allocate a print register to store the trace information. An attendant can activate Malicious Call Trace (MCT) only from an Attendant Console by using the Trace (TRC) feature key.
PAGE 1001
Malicious Call Trace Page 1961 of 3156 Enhanced Malicious Call Trace for Saudi Arabia From a user’s perspective, the Malicious Call Trace feature activation remains the same as it was prior to this enhancement. However, with this enhancement the feature is now available for different types of analog and digital (CO, DID, and DOD) trunks. In order to send the MCT request, a special digit string is transmitted to the CO for an analog or digital trunk interface.
PAGE 1002
Page 1962 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace Lamp Flashing The lamp flashing (slower frequency than winkling) indicates that the call trace request to the CO was transmitted successfully, but a recorder could not be conferenced in. Activation of the TRC key during this state regenerates the MCT record, activates the alarm, and again attempts to conference in the recorder. The call trace request signaling to the Central Office is not transmitted again.
PAGE 1003
Malicious Call Trace Page 1963 of 3156 MCT can be activated against only one established call at a time, regardless of the number of TRC keys defined. The Meridian 1 is responsible for seizing the trunk to which recorders are connected. When a recorder is involved in the call, the call is treated as a conference call. The party on the source side is allowed to disconnect from the call; doing so also disconnects the recorder and resets the TRC key lamp to dark.
PAGE 1004
Page 1964 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace Calling Party Privacy Incoming calls to stations having the Malicious Call Trace feature enabled will continue to include the Terminal Number (TN) of the calling party in the Malicious Call Trace record, even if the caller has requested Calling Party Privacy.
PAGE 1005
Malicious Call Trace Page 1965 of 3156 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Emergency Key (EMR) The Malicious Call Trace feature operates in a similar manner to the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Emergency Key (EMR) feature when conferencing a recording. In this enhancement, the ACD set can activate both the Malicious Call Trace and ACD EMR features. Called Party Control Option Prior to this feature, the Called Party Control (CDPC) option was not supported for conference calls.
PAGE 1006
Page 1966 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace Malicious Call Trace Idle Signal The existing operation of the Malicious Call Trace Idle Signal feature is unchanged. Meridian 911 The Trunk Hook Flash functionality is used by Meridian 911, Enhanced Malicious Call Trace, and Autodial Tandem Transfer. Feature packaging Malicious Call Trace (MCT) and Enhanced Malicious Call Trace (EMCT) require Malicious Call Trace (MCT) package 107.
PAGE 1007
Malicious Call Trace Page 1967 of 3156 Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 10 – Enable MCT on an Analog (500/2500 type) telephone. 2 LD 11 – Enable MCT on a Meridian 1 Proprietary Telephone. 3 LD 17 – Allow printing of the MCT record on a dedicated MCT TTY port. 4 LD 16 – Set up the recorder route. 5 LD 14 – Set up the recorder trunk. 6 LD 15 – Set up the recorder and alarm options.
PAGE 1008
Page 1968 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace LD 10 – Enable MCT on an Analog (500/2500 type) telephone. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE: 500 Analog (500/2500 type) telephone data block. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. Terminal Number for Option 11C. CLS MCTA, MCTD Malicious Call Trace is allowed if Class of Service is MCTA.
PAGE 1009
Malicious Call Trace Page 1969 of 3156 LD 17 – Allow printing of the MCT record on a dedicated MCT TTY port. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE ADAN Configuration Record. Gate opener. - ADAN xxx TTY yy xxx = NEW or CHG. yy = port number 0-63 or 0-15. - USR MCT Dedicated TTY port for MCT record. LD 16 – Set up the recorder route. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE RDB Route data block. ROUT xxx Route number.
PAGE 1010
Page 1970 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace CUST 0-99 Customer number. RTMB xxx xxx Trunk route and member number for RCD. LD 15 – Set up the recorder and alarm options. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG PRT END Change, print, or end. TYPE: FTR Gate opener. CUST 0-99 Customer number. - ALDN xxxxxxx DN for the alarm (the DN must be on the local system). - ALRM (NO) YES The ALRM prompt appears only if ALDN is defined.
PAGE 1011
Malicious Call Trace Page 1971 of 3156 TYPE RDB Route data block. TKTP DID COT Direct Inward Dial or Central Office trunks. ALRM (NO) YES Malicious Call Trace is allowed for external calls when the response is YES. Note: In order to activate Malicious Call Trace from an analog (500/ 2500 type) telephone without using the SPRE and 83, the MCT FFC has to be defined. LD 57 – Define the MCTFFC. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Code.
PAGE 1012
Page 1972 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace CNTL YES Changes control or timers. - TIMR FLH 60(510)-32640 Hook Flash timer (in msec.) The range for Centrex Switchhook flash timer is 256-(512)1536. For CAS, it is recommended that the timer be set at 768 or greater. This timer must be at least 256 ms shorter than the remote OGF timer and 256 ms shorter than the ICF timer.
PAGE 1013
Malicious Call Trace Page 1973 of 3156 LD 14 – Enable Firmware timing for trunk hook flash (if available). Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE DID COT Trunk type. TN lscu cu Terminal Number. Terminal Number for Option 11C. XTRK EXUT XCOT Card type FWTM (NO) YES Firmware timing for the trunk hook flash is available. This prompt is set to YES if firmware timing for trunk hook flash is supported by the card. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number.
PAGE 1014
Page 1974 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace P RRC(S) abcd Register recall signal activated by MCT. TIME 10-(100)-630 Time of RRC(S) signal in milliseconds. This is the flash duration used for 2.0 Mbit DTI trunks. It is programmable in one-millisecond increments from 10 to 630. LD 16 – Set up MCTM timer and tandem delay (2 Mbps PRI for AXE-10 Australia only). Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE CDB Customer data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number.
PAGE 1015
Page 1975 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace on Direct Inward Dialing Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1975 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1975 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1976 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1016
Page 1976 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace on Direct Inward Dialing The Malicious Call Trace on DID feature is not available on 1.5 Mbit digital trunks or Japanese Digital Multiplex Interface (DMI) trunks. Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131.
PAGE 1017
Malicious Call Trace on Direct Inward Dialing Page 1977 of 3156 LD 11 – Enable MCT on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone data block. Prompt Response Description ... CLS Class of Service. MCTA Malicious Call Trace allowed. When MCTD is assigned, the MCT key is removed. KEY xx TRC MCT Key number. LD 15 – Enable MCT signal Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE: FTR Gate opener.
PAGE 1018
Page 1978 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace on Direct Inward Dialing Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 1019
Page 1979 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace DN/TN Print Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1979 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1979 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1980 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1020
Page 1980 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace DN/TN Print Feature interactions The same as for Malicious Call Trace. Feature packaging Malicious Call Trace (MCT) package 107. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 15 – Enable Printing of Malicious call DN/CDIP information. LD 15 – Enable Printing of Malicious call DN/CDIP information. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: FTR Gate opener.
PAGE 1021
Malicious Call Trace DN/TN Print 6 Time stamp hh:mm:ss++MM/DD/YYYY 7 CNIDCNI#xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Page 1981 of 3156 Second Line Field No.
PAGE 1022
Page 1982 of 3156 553-3001-306 Malicious Call Trace DN/TN Print Standard 10.
PAGE 1023
Page 1983 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace Idle Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1983 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1983 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1984 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1024
Page 1984 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace Idle DID calls which terminate on an Attendant Console result in either a Multifrequency Compelled IDLE or IDCT signal being returned, depending on the customer option. This applies to both direct and intercept calls. When an Attendant Console is in Night Service, the signal being returned is determined by the customer option and not by the classification of the night DN, unless a DID call comes into a night DN.
PAGE 1025
Malicious Call Trace Idle Page 1985 of 3156 Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 10 – Enable MCT on an Analog (500/2500 type) telephone. 2 LD 11 – Enable MCT on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone. 3 LD 15 – Enable the MCT signal. 4 LD 94 – Create or modify the MFC tables. 5 LD 16 – Create or modify data for each DID trunk route data block to allow or deny MFC Signaling option.
PAGE 1026
Page 1986 of 3156 Malicious Call Trace Idle LD 15 – Enable the MCT signal. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: FTR Gate opener. MCTA Malicious Call Trace signal is allowed for attendants at this customer location. ... - OPT LD 94 – Create or modify the MFC tables. Prompt Response Description TYPE MFT Multifrequency table. ICOG ICT OGT Incoming Table, Outgoing Table. TBNO 1 - 127 MFC Table number. XMIT IDCT n Idle Call Trace Signal number.
PAGE 1027
Malicious Call Trace Idle Page 1987 of 3156 CDCT (NO) YES Called Party Control (is not) is to be allowed on Malicious Call Trace Idle Calls. CDPC (NO) YES Called Party Control (is not) is activated when the IDCT signal is sent for non-toll calls. LD 14 – Create or modify data for each DID trunk data block to allow or deny MFC Signaling option. Prompt Response CLS MFL Description Class of Service. (DIP) DTN MFC Dial Pulse. Dual Tone Multifrequency. R2 MFC Signal.
PAGE 1028
Page 1988 of 3156 553-3001-306 Malicious Call Trace Idle Standard 10.
PAGE 1029
Page 1989 of 3156 Manual Line Service Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1030
Page 1990 of 3156 Manual Line Service Attendant Overflow Position When Attendant Overflow Position (AOP) is defined, Manual Line Service follows the AOP directions. Automatic Wake Up Automatic Wake Up (AWU) does not support these features; an AWU call cannot be programmed against a manual line or private line DN. Night Service When the system is in Night Service (NSVC) mode, all telephones with a manual Class of Service are routed to the telephone designated as the night number for the customer group.
PAGE 1031
Manual Line Service Page 1991 of 3156 LD 10 – Define Class of Service for Manual Line telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: 500 Telephone type. TN lscu Terminal Number. DN xxx...x Directory Number assigned to the telephone. CLS MNL Arrange telephone for Manual Line Service. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
PAGE 1032
Page 1992 of 3156 553-3001-306 Manual Line Service Standard 10.
PAGE 1033
Page 1993 of 3156 Manual Service Recall to Attendant Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1034
Page 1994 of 3156 Manual Service Recall to Attendant Feature packaging International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131. Feature implementation Task summary list The following task is required: LD 16 – Create or modify data for each DID trunk route data block to have or deny MFC Signaling: LD 16 – Create or modify data for each DID trunk route data block to have or deny MFC Signaling: Prompt Response Description (NO) ATT Enter ATT to allow Manual Service Recall to the attendant. ...
PAGE 1035
Page 1995 of 3156 Manual Signaling (Buzz) Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1996 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1036
Page 1996 of 3156 Manual Signaling (Buzz) Only Single Appearance Directory Numbers can be buzzed. Feature interactions Call Party Name Display If the Signal key is pressed to buzz another telephone, no digit or name display appears on the telephone. Network and Executive Distinctive Ringing Network Distinctive Ringing and Executive Distinctive Ringing do not affect the buzzing of a set.
PAGE 1037
Manual Signaling (Buzz) Page 1997 of 3156 LD 11 – Add Manual Signaling (Buzz) key for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change. TYPE: aaaa Telephone type, where: aaaa = SL1, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, or 3000. TN lscu Terminal Number. KEY xx SIG yyy...y Add a Manual Signaling (Buzz) key, where: xx = key number, and yyy...y = DN to be buzzed (must be a Single Appearance Directory Number).
PAGE 1038
Page 1998 of 3156 553-3001-306 Manual Signaling (Buzz) Standard 10.
PAGE 1039
Page 1999 of 3156 Manual Trunk Service Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1999 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1999 Feature interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1040
Page 2000 of 3156 Manual Trunk Service Feature interactions There are no feature interactions associated with this feature. Feature packaging This feature is included in base X11 System Software. Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 16 – Add or change an incoming manual trunk route. 2 LD 14 – Add or change an incoming manual trunk. 3 LD 16 – Add or change an outgoing manual trunk route.
PAGE 1041
Manual Trunk Service Page 2001 of 3156 LD 14 – Add or change an incoming manual trunk. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE TIE TIE trunks are required for manual incoming trunks. TN lscu Terminal number. CUST 0-99 Customer number. RTMB rrr mmm Route and member number. MNDN xxx...x Directory Number for automatically terminate. SIGL aaa Trunk signaling, where: aaa = DX2, DX4, EAM, EM4, GRD, LDR, LOP, or OAD.
PAGE 1042
Page 2002 of 3156 TKTP Manual Trunk Service aaa Outgoing trunk type, where: aaa = ADM, AID, ATVN, AWR, CAA, CAM, COT, CSA, DIC, DID, FEX, ISA, ISL, MDM, MUS, PAG, RAN, RCD, RLM, RLR, TIE, or WAT. ICOG OGT Outgoing route. ACOD xx . . x Trunk route access code. MANO YES Enable manual outgoing trunk route. LD 14 – Add or change an outgoing manual trunk. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE aaa Outgoing trunk type. TN lscu Terminal number.
PAGE 1043
Page 2003 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attendant Console Autoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Attendant Console Directory Number (IADN) . .. . . . . . Attendant Emergency Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2004 2004 2007 2012 Operating parameters . . . . .
PAGE 1044
Page 2004 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Feature description The Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements (MACE) feature expands existing Meridian 1 Attendant Console functionality.
PAGE 1045
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2005 of 3156 Figure 55 M1 Attendant Console with four Autoline keys configured 28-Nov-97 Meridian 1 IDLE 4:57:44 pm AUTO Terry Smith C/H DID dnd.ind CFB AUTO CFNA AUTO Fire Services Paging Access CFW IADN bki LD2 AUTO 911 Emergency * LD1 LD0 s.call Loop keys Flexible Feature keys 553-7362.
PAGE 1046
Page 2006 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements In order for an Autoline call to be placed, the attendant presses a Loop key and then presses the Autoline key. When the Autoline key is pressed, the preprogrammed number is automatically dialed. Figure 56 shows an Attendant Console display when an Autoline call is placed. In this example, the attendant places an Autoline call to Terry Smith at DN 2029.
PAGE 1047
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2007 of 3156 Figure 58 shows an example of an Attendant Console display when the attendant is already involved in an established call. In this example, Pat Jones at DN 2020 dials the attendant, and a call is established. The attendant wishes to extend the current call to Terry Smith at DN 2029 and does so by pressing the Autoline key that is configured with Terry Smith’s DN. Once the Autoline key is pressed, the attendant display is as shown in Figure 58.
PAGE 1048
Page 2008 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Figure 59 M1 Attendant Console with an IADN ICI key configured 28-Nov-97 Meridian 1 IDLE 4:57:44 pm AUTO C/H DID dnd.ind CFB AUTO CFNA AUTO CFW IADN bki LD2 AUTO * LD1 LD0 s.call Incoming Call Indicator keys 553-7605.EPS When an IADN call is made to an Attendant Console that is already active, the call is placed in the attendant queue.
PAGE 1049
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2009 of 3156 The default cadence for Priority Buzzing is two seconds on and ten seconds off. However, the cadence can be modified with the Priority Buzzing Cadence (PBUZ) prompt in the Customer Data Block. The PBUZ prompt is a prompt introduced with this feature. The flexible cadence value range is from 2-16 seconds in multiples of two seconds for the on and the off buzzing phases.
PAGE 1050
Page 2010 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements 4 The next call in the queue is presented to the attendant. All ICI keys on the Attendant Console, including the IADN key, are updated. The IADN ICI key lamp flashes if there is at least one IADN call waiting in the attendant queue. 5 The attendant chooses to answer the IADN call, from the queue, by pressing the IADN ICI key.
PAGE 1051
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2011 of 3156 When an IADN ICI key is not configured and whether or not the IDBZ prompt is set to YES, Priority Buzzing does not function. The IADN ICI key must be configured for the Priority Buzzing functionality to be applicable. Consider the following example: 1 An attendant is involved in an active call. 2 An IADN call is placed to the active attendant and waits in the attendant queue. No Priority Buzzing is provided to the Attendant Console.
PAGE 1052
Page 2012 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Attendant Emergency Codes The Attendant Emergency Codes functionality allows an internal/external set to access a group of attendants by dialing an emergency code. This functionality is an enhancement to the existing Departmental Listed Directory Number (DLDN) feature. The DLDN feature allows specified telephones that share the same numbering plan to belong to one out of a possible six subgroups in a Meridian 1 customer.
PAGE 1053
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2013 of 3156 Figure 60 An example of Attendant Console DLDN groupings Attendant 1 LDN 0 Attendant 2 LDN 1 Attendant 3 Attendant 4 LDN 5 Attendant 5 Attendant 6 553-7610.EPS ICI keys LDN 0 to LDN 5 can be configured for LDN calls. Emergency code calls use these same ICI keys, as the Attendant Emergency Codes functionality is an enhancement of the DLDN feature. One ICI key can be associated with more than one type of incoming call.
PAGE 1054
Page 2014 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Figure 61 An M1 Attendant Console with three LDN ICI keys configured 28-Nov-97 Meridian 1 IDLE 4:57:44 pm AUTO C/H Disaster Situation Fire DID dnd.ind CFB AUTO CFNA AUTO CFW Cardiac Arrest IADN bki LD2 AUTO LD1 LD0 Incoming Call Indicator keys * s.call 553-7606.EPS Attendant Emergency Codes functionality provides each DLDN group with the option for Priority Buzzing.
PAGE 1055
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2015 of 3156 Idle Attendant Console When an internal/external emergency code call is placed, the Meridian 1 system seeks an idle attendant in the DLDN group. The emergency code calls are presented on an idle Loop key in a “Round Robin” fashion. For example, when an LDN call is received, it is presented to the next listed attendant after the one that was last offered a call. This ensures that emergency code calls are distributed in an equitable fashion.
PAGE 1056
Page 2016 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Active Attendant Console An Attendant Console is in an active state when the Release lamp is dark and the Position Busy key is not activated. When an internal/external call is placed to a DLDN group in which all attendants are active, the call is placed in the attendant queue. The LDN ICI key corresponding to this LDN is updated whenever an Attendant Console of the Customer becomes idle.
PAGE 1057
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2017 of 3156 Referring to Figure 60, consider the following example regarding an active Attendant Console: 1 Party 1 (an internal set or external trunk) dials LDN0. 2 The LDN 0 ICI key lamp is lit for all Attendant Consoles not in the DLDN group. 3 The LDBZ prompt in the Customer Data Block is checked for whether or not LDN0 should be buzzed when an emergency code call is waiting in the attendant queue.
PAGE 1058
Page 2018 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements If the LDN ICI key is not configured, the LDN call does not receive Attendant Emergency Codes treatment, regardless of how the LDBZ prompt is defined in the Customer Data Block. Without the LDN ICI key configured, the call cannot be taken “out of turn” from the attendant queue, and no Priority Buzzing is provided.
PAGE 1059
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2019 of 3156 The DN programmed on the Autoline key is not verified for validity during configuration. If the DN is invalid, the attendant receives an overflow tone when the Autoline key is used. The Attendant Autoline key lamp always remains dark. Individual Attendant Console Directory Number (IADN) IADN functionality is supported on digital Attendant Consoles (M2250) only. IADNs must be unique DNs. Therefore, they cannot be Multiple Appearance DNs.
PAGE 1060
Page 2020 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements When an Attendant Console is service changed in Overlay 12 while it is active, the Attendant Console goes into a Position Busy state. In this case, Priority Buzzing stops for any buzzing IADN call waiting in the attendant queue.
PAGE 1061
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2021 of 3156 When an IADN call is placed in the attendant queue and waits for a console that is already being buzzed (Recall Buzzing, Attendant Emergency Codes Priority Buzzing, or another IADN call Priority Buzzing) Priority Buzzing is not provided immediately. Priority Buzzing is not provided when an IADN call is presented to an idle Attendant Console with normal buzzing.
PAGE 1062
Page 2022 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements When an emergency code call is placed in the attendant queue, a maximum of a two second delay may occur before Priority Buzzing begins. Each DLDN that is configured as an emergency code number decreases one customer LDN. When an Attendant Console is service changed in Overlay 12 while it is active, the Attendant Console goes into a Position Busy state.
PAGE 1063
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2023 of 3156 If the LDN ICI key configuration is removed from the Customer Data Block, or if an LDN group is removed from the LDBZ prompt, then Priority Buzzing for any emergency code calls waiting in the attendant queue is stopped. The attendant will no longer be able to answer the DLDN call “out of turn” from the attendant queue. An emergency code call that enters the attendant queue to wait for an Attendant Console which is already being buzzed (e.g.
PAGE 1064
Page 2024 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Attendant Calls Waiting Indication The Call Waiting lamp on the console winks when the Call Waiting queue Update (CWUP) prompt is set to NO and there is at least one IADN call waiting in the attendant queue for the particular console. If CWUP = YES in the Customer Data Block, the Call Waiting count on the console includes the IADN calls waiting in the queue. When CWUP = YES, the Call Waiting lamp always remains lit.
PAGE 1065
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2025 of 3156 For an IADN call to be recalled to the same attendant, the Recall to Same Attendant (RTSA) feature must be configured. The Recall ICI key lamp is lit when an IADN call slow answer recalls back to the attendant. The IADN ICI key lamp is not lit in this case, and Priority Buzzing is not applied.
PAGE 1066
Page 2026 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Call Redirection features Whenever an IADN call is made as a result of Call Redirection, this call receives the standard IADN treatment (i.e. Priority Buzzing and IADN ICI). The Attendant IADN feature does not distinguish between forwarded calls and direct dial IADN calls. Hunt If an IADN is defined as part of a Hunt chain, calls terminate to the IADN, following the Hunt chain.
PAGE 1067
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2027 of 3156 Network Message Services The IADN ICI key takes priority over the MWC ICI key. When a call is forwarded to an IADN over a network to a Message Center, the call receives Priority Buzzing and the IADN ICI key is updated (if configured). Night Service When the Meridian 1 system is in Night mode and an IADN call is the next call to be presented, the call receives Night treatment as defined for the Customer.
PAGE 1068
Page 2028 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Network-wide Listed Directory Number When the DLDN dialed at one node is configured as an emergency code number at a remote node, a call routed via Network Attendant Service (NAS) (when Network-wide Listed Directory Number (NLDN) is configured) terminates at the remote node and receives priority treatment.
PAGE 1069
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2029 of 3156 IDBZ YES Individual Attendant DN Buzzing-on for IADN calls in the attendant queue. NO = Individual Attendant DN Buzzing-off for IADN calls in the attendant queue (default). PBUZ xx yy Flexible Priority Buzzing cadence for IADN and Attendant Emergency Code calls, where: xx = Priority Buzzing - on phase yy = Priority Buzzing - off phase The PBUZ range is from 2 to 16 seconds.
PAGE 1070
Page 2030 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements ICI xx LD0 xx LD1 xx LD2 xx LD3 xx LD4 xx LD5 Incoming Call Indication for Listed Directory Numbers 0-5. xx = key number 00-19. LDBZ nnnnnn The DLDN groups which should be buzzed when an LDN/ emergency code call is in the attendant queue, where: n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and/or 5. LD 12 – Configure an Autoline DN for an Attendant Console. Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change existing data. TYPE 2250 ATT 1250 Attendant Console type.
PAGE 1071
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements ANUM Page 2031 of 3156 1 - 63 Attendant Number. xxxx Individual Attendant DN for this Attendant Console. ... IADN The Individual Attendant DN can be 1-4 digits in length or 17 digits in length if DNXP package 150 is equipped. The IADN cannot be a Multiple Appearance DN. Feature operation Attendant Console Autoline key To place an Autoline call: 1 The attendant presses a Loop key. The Loop key lamp is lit. 2 The attendant presses the Autoline key.
PAGE 1072
Page 2032 of 3156 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements To display the DN programmed for the Autoline key, the attendant presses the Autoline key when the console is idle or in Position Busy. On an analog console, to display a DN that is longer than eight digits, the attendant presses the display key after pressing the Autoline key.
PAGE 1073
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Page 2033 of 3156 Attendant Emergency Codes The following is an example of Attendant Emergency Codes functionality for Attendant Consoles with an LDN ICI key configured. Also, the DLDN group is included for LDN Buzzing at the LDBZ prompt. Referring to Figure 60: 1 Party 1 (an internal set or external trunk) dials LDN0. 2 The LD0 ICI key lamp is lit for all Attendant Consoles not in the DLDN group.
PAGE 1074
Page 2034 of 3156 553-3001-306 Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements Standard 10.
PAGE 1075
Page 2035 of 3156 Meridian 1 Initialization Prevention and Recovery Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Loop Response Time-out Initialization (LRIP) . .. . . . . . . Serial Data Interface Device Response Time-out Initialization Prevention (SRIP) . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Loop Overload Initialization Prevention (LOIP) . . .
PAGE 1076
Page 2036 of 3156 Meridian 1 Initialization Prevention and Recovery • Network Loop Overload Initialization Prevention (LOIP), and • Localized Faulty Hardware Recovery (FHWR). Network Loop Response Time-out Initialization, Serial Data Interface Device Response Time-out Initialization Prevention, and Network Loop Overload Initialization Prevention are designed to prevent system initialization.
PAGE 1077
Meridian 1 Initialization Prevention and Recovery Page 2037 of 3156 Localized Faulty Hardware Recovery (FHWR) Once a network loop, SDI or ESDI is identified as being faulty, it is tracked by the FHWR function. When the Meridian 1 is available to load and run a background routine and the faulty network loop, SDI or ESDI device is still in enabled status, an appropriate maintenance overlay is automatically invoked to disable it.
PAGE 1078
Page 2038 of 3156 Meridian 1 Initialization Prevention and Recovery Feature implementation There are no specific implementation procedures for this feature. Feature operation No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature. 553-3001-306 Standard 10.
PAGE 1079
Page 2039 of 3156 Meridian 911 Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2040 Basic 911 service . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2041 Enhanced 911 service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2041 Meridian 911 (M911) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1080
Page 2040 of 3156 Meridian 911 Feature description The number 911 has been adopted for the purpose of reporting emergencies and requesting emergency services.
PAGE 1081
Meridian 911 Page 2041 of 3156 To protect a caller’s right to privacy, some communities still allow the use of seven-digit emergency numbers, routed either to an answering center or directly to the responding agency. Basic 911 service Basic 911 service routes emergency calls to an answering center based on the location of the Public Exchange/Central Office serving the calling station. The jurisdiction of an answering center is determined by the Central Office boundaries.
PAGE 1082
Page 2042 of 3156 Meridian 911 The Automatic Number Identification (ANI) of a 911 call consists of eight digits (a Numbering Plan or Information digit followed by the seven digits of the calling party number). Whether the first digit of the ANI string is to be interpreted as a Numbering Plan Digit (NPD) or an Information Digit (ID) depends on the trunk interface and Meridian 911 configuration.
PAGE 1083
Meridian 911 Page 2043 of 3156 • displays the calling party’s number • puts the calling party number into Call Detail Recording (CDR) Q and N records, and • provides an external notification that an emergency call is queued. Figure 62 Routing the call, along with the ANI digits, to the Meridian 1 M911 trunk ANI: 05551234 911 call location 555-1234 553-7823.
PAGE 1084
Page 2044 of 3156 Meridian 911 Once the call is abandoned, the trunk is released for other 911 calls. Information on abandoned calls can be included in Call Detail Recording (CDR) records if New Format CDR (FCDR) package 234 is equipped. Operating parameters Meridian 911 Meridian 911 routes are restricted to incoming traffic only. Incoming M911 trunks use MF signaling only. Dial Pulse (DP) and Dual-tone Multifrequency (DTMF) are not supported for M911 routes.
PAGE 1085
Meridian 911 Page 2045 of 3156 M911 trunk calls must terminate on a CDN. If an autoterminate DN is specified that is not a CDN, an SCH error message is printed. If a CDN is used as the autoterminate destination of at least one M911 trunk, the CDN cannot be removed via LD 23 (an SCH message will be given). To remove the CDN, all M911 trunks terminating to it must be removed, or they must be changed to terminate to a different CDN. CDNs as well as ACD DNs are normal dialable numbers.
PAGE 1086
Page 2046 of 3156 Meridian 911 When the call is abandoned, the speech path is dropped, and the trunk is released. If Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125 is equipped, it is possible to configure a tone other than the one provided by default. Call Abandon is configured on a per route basis. Call Abandon is supported on 911 trunks only. No B record is generated by CDR for an M911 abandoned call, because the B record is package dependent and only applies to an established call with Internal CDR.
PAGE 1087
Meridian 911 Page 2047 of 3156 Automatic Call Distribution Interactions ACD-C Reports The Meridian 911 product does not change the ACD-C reports. M911 will use the ACD-C reports for CDNs as introduced for Customer Controlled Routing (CCR). Only four of the fields in the report will have any meaning. Because M911 uses the Route-to Application Module Link (AML) message instead of the Queue-to message, only “Route To”, “Default DN”, “Abandoned”, and “Calls Accepted” are meaningful.
PAGE 1088
Page 2048 of 3156 Meridian 911 Customer Controlled Routing (CCR) Call Abandoned Message (ICAB) This message is sent for controlled calls that were abandoned before being answered. Customer Controlled Routing (CCR) Call Enters Queue Message (ICEQ) This message is sent to ACD-MAX each time a default call is placed in the default ACD DN (default mode).
PAGE 1089
Meridian 911 Page 2049 of 3156 Interflow 911 calls interflow the same as other ACD calls. If the interflow feature is configured so that when a call gets busy tone from an internal destination, the 911 call will not get busy tone, but will instead be linked back into the source ACD queue. If the interflow destination is a number outside the Meridian 1, the software has no control over the treatment the call gets, so this configuration is not recommended for 911 sites.
PAGE 1090
Page 2050 of 3156 Meridian 911 Call Transfer Trunk priority associated with an incoming 911 call is only preserved if blind transfer is used. Called Party Disconnect Control The Called Party Disconnect Control (CPDC) feature is used to retain a 911 trunk when a 911 call is disconnected by the caller. No modification to the feature is required for Meridian 911, except lifting the CPDC and ACD NCFW limitation.
PAGE 1091
Meridian 911 Page 2051 of 3156 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Primary Rate Interface 911 trunks are not supported on ISDN PRI Trunks or Integrated Service Link (ISL) trunks. Japan Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunks Japan DID trunks are not supported. Malicious Call Trace The Malicious Call Trace (MCT) feature is modified to be supported on ACD sets. ACD sets are allowed to have the Malicious Call Trace Allowed (MCTA) Class of Service and a Trace (TRC) key defined.
PAGE 1092
Page 2052 of 3156 Meridian 911 Meridian 911 Call Abandon Attendant Break-In Since an abandoned call does not have a speech path established, the BreakIn deny treatment is given to the attendant so that Break-In cannot occur. Automatic Call Distribution When a call is abandoned, the call remains in its current state (for instance, Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) queue, CDN queue, or ringing on an ACD agent set).
PAGE 1093
Meridian 911 Page 2053 of 3156 Call Transfer M911 abandoned calls cannot be transferred or conferenced. Called Party Disconnect Control There is no interaction with M911 Call Abandon and Called Party Disconnect Control. Conference M911 abandoned calls cannot be conferenced. Display Calls Waiting Key ACD Calls Waiting Key Ongoing Status Display Real-time Display In all of these situations, abandoned calls contribute to the queue count. Hold M911 abandoned calls cannot be put on hold.
PAGE 1094
Page 2054 of 3156 Meridian 911 No Hold Conference M911 abandoned calls cannot be No Hold conferenced. Not Ready Key When an abandoned call is presented to an agent and the agent presses the Not Ready Key, the call is put back into the queue. If an agent is established on an abandoned call and presses the Not Ready Key, the call is dropped. Overflow by Count Abandoned calls contribute to the queue count. An abandoned call can overflow.
PAGE 1095
Meridian 911 Page 2055 of 3156 The following additional packages are not required, but are recommended: • At least one of either Call Detail Recording (CDR) package 4 or Call Detail Recording on Teletype Machine (CTY) package 5 • Automatic Call Distribution Package C (ACDC) package 42 (not needed if packages 51 and 52 are enabled) • Automatic Call Distribution Load Management Reports (LMAN) package 43 • Automatic Call Distribution Package D (ACDD) package 50 • Automatic Call Distribution Package
PAGE 1096
Page 2056 of 3156 Meridian 911 Feature implementation Task summary list The following is a summary of the tasks in this section: 1 LD 10 – Configure a Terminal Number for an analog (500/2500 type) telephone with a Class of Service of CWNA (Call Waiting Notification Allowed). 2 LD 23 – Configure ACD DNs. The CWNC (CWNT control) is recommended to be set as YES for the primary answering centers (rings for priority calls only) and NO for secondary answering centers (rings for all calls).
PAGE 1097
Meridian 911 Page 2057 of 3156 LD 10 – Configure a Terminal Number for an analog (500/2500 type) telephone with a Class of Service of CWNA (Call Waiting Notification Allowed). Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW New. TYPE: 500 Type of telephone set. TN lscu cu Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, and unit). For Option 11C. DES xxx Office Data Administration System (ODAS) package designator. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. nn...n Internal Directory Number.
PAGE 1098
Page 2058 of 3156 MAXP Meridian 911 nn Maximum number of agent positions. ISAP YES ACD DN uses Meridian Link messaging. VSID n Server ID used for Meridian Link messaging (defined in LD 17). 2047 Recommended overflow threshold. CWNT lscu Call Waiting Notification TN. CWNC YES Call Waiting Notification control. ... ... OVTH ... LD 23 – Configure CDNs. The ceiling value is irrelevant for 911 calls terminating at the CDN, but will be applied to non-911 type calls.
PAGE 1099
Meridian 911 Page 2059 of 3156 CNTL YES Controlled mode (controlled = YES). VSID n Server ID used for Meridian Link messaging (defined in LD 17). LD 16 – Configure an M911 route. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE RDB Route data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. ROUTE nnn Route number. TKTP DID Meridian 911 routes use Direct Inward Dialing trunks. M911_ANI YES Enter YES for 911 route.
PAGE 1100
Page 2060 of 3156 Meridian 911 TRMT (NONE) NPA FAIL TEST Numbering Plan Digit or Information Digit treatment. - NPA nnn Numbering Plan Area. Prompted only if TRMT = NPA. LD 14 – Configure 911 trunks. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW New. TYPE DID Meridian 911 trunks must be DID. TN lscu Terminal number (loop, shelf, card, and unit). XTRK XUT, XEM Universal, or Enhanced E&M trunk card. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C.
PAGE 1101
Meridian 911 Page 2061 of 3156 LD 16 – Configure Call Detail Recording (CDR). Prompt Response Description REQ CHG Change. TYPE RDB Route data block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. ROUTE xxx Route number. TKTP DID Meridian 911 routes use DID trunks. CDR YES CDR trunk route. INC YES CDR records generated on incoming calls. QREC NO CDR ACD Q initial records to be generated. ... LD 17 – Configure the insertion of ANI digits into the CDR record.
PAGE 1102
Page 2062 of 3156 Meridian 911 TN lscu Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, and unit). CDEN (DD) SD 4D (Double), single and quadruple card density. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. DIG xx yy Dial Intercom Group number and Member number. DN nn...n Directory Number. 2 ISDN/AP status message group. USMA Unsolicited Status Allowed Class of Service. M911 position. ... IAPG ... CLS LD 11 – Configure non-ACD sets (Meridian 1 proprietary telephones).
PAGE 1103
Meridian 911 CLS Page 2063 of 3156 USMA MCTA Unsolicited Status Allowed Class of Service. M911 position; Malicious Call Trace allowed. 2 ISDN/AP status message group. xx SCR yyyy This defines a Single Call Ringing DN key. The xx is the key number and the yyyy is the DN. ... IAPG ... KEY LD 11 – Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones to function as ACD sets. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Add a set.
PAGE 1104
Page 2064 of 3156 Meridian 911 KEY 0 ACD yyyy Key 0; ACD; ACD Directory Number. KEY xx TRC Malicious Call Trace key. The xx is the key number. LD 16 – Enable M911 Call Abandon. Prompt Response Description REQ NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE RDB Route Data Block. CUST 0-99 0-31 Customer number. For Option 11C. ROUT 0-511 0-127 Route number. For Option 11C. TKTP DID M911 trunks are DID trunk type. (NO) YES Set to YES to receive ANI for M911 routes. ...
PAGE 1105
Meridian 911 Page 2065 of 3156 TYPE FTC Flexible Tone and Cadence data block. TABL 0-31 FTC table number. DFLT 0-31 Default table number. RING ... CAB YES M911 Call Abandon upon Answer Tone. TDSH i bb cc tt TDS external, burst, cadence, and tone. XTON 0-255 NT8D17 TDS Tone code. XCAD 0-255 NT8D17 cadence code for FCAD.
PAGE 1106
Page 2066 of 3156 Meridian 911 Figure 63 shows what is displayed on a telephone set with a Numbering Plan Digit (NPD) call with an NPD of 2 and with the Call Party Name Display feature enabled. The trunk group name is displayed on the first line of the set display; the ANI appears on the second line. Figure 63 Display for an NPD call 911 Call 2 493-6002 ABAND 553-7824.
PAGE 1107
Page 2067 of 3156 Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity Contents The following are the topics in this section: Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2067 Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2068 Feature packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2068 Feature implementation . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1108
Page 2068 of 3156 Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity Operating parameters This feature works with the Companion Meridian Controller Card (CMCC), the Meridian Companion Radio Card (CMRC), the DECT Mobility Card (DMC) and the DECT Mobility Card - Expander (DMC-E). The CMCC and CMRC supported systems include Option 11C, 51C, 61C, and 81C with IPE equipment. The DMC and DMC-E supported systems include Option 11C, 11C Mini, and 51C to 81C with IPE shelves.
PAGE 1109
Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity Page 2069 of 3156 LD 10 – Configure up to 16 or 32 units on a CMCC, CMRC, or DMC/DMC-E. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG Add new data. Change existing data. TYPE: 500 500 set. lscu cu Terminal Number. l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit for Options 51-81C. c = card, u = unit for Option 11C. CDEN (4D) Card density. WRLS (NO) YES Wireless analog set. MWUN (16) 32 Maximum number of wireless units. The MWUN prompt appears only if WRLS = YES.
PAGE 1110
Page 2070 of 3156 553-3001-306 Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity Standard 10.
PAGE 1111
PAGE 1112
Family Product Manual Contacts Copyright FCC notice Trademarks Document number Product release Document release Date PublishCopy Meridian 1 and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise 1000 Features and Services Book 2 of 3 Copyright ©1994–2002 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.